Volvo Automobile S40 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEAR VOLVO OWNER  
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO  
We hope that you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in  
your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and com-  
fort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest  
cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy  
all current safety and environmental requirements.  
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend  
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions  
and maintenance information contained in this Owner’s  
Manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
00 Introduction  
01 Safety  
02 Instruments and controls  
Introduction ........................................ 6  
Volvo Cars and the environment......... 7  
Seatbelts .......................................... 12  
Airbag system .................................. 15  
Airbags (SRS)................................... 16  
Overview, left-hand drive cars .......... 36  
Overview, right-hand drive cars........ 38  
Driver’s door control panel ............... 40  
Combined instrument panel ............. 41  
Indicator and warning symbols......... 42  
Information display ........................... 46  
Activating/deactivating  
the airbag (SRS) ............................... 19  
Side airbags (SIPS bags).................. 21  
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ....................... 23  
WHIPS.............................................. 24  
When the systems deploy................ 26  
Crash mode...................................... 27  
Child safety ...................................... 28  
Electrical socket and switches on  
centre console .................................. 47  
Lighting panel ................................... 48  
Left-hand stalk switch ...................... 50  
Right-hand stalk switch .................... 52  
Cruise control (option) ...................... 54  
Steering wheel keypad (option) ........ 55  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard  
warning flashers................................ 56  
Parking brake, electrical socket........ 57  
Power windows................................. 58  
Rearview and door mirrors ............... 60  
Power sunroof (option)...................... 64  
Personal preferences ........................ 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Contents  
03 Climate control  
04 Interior  
05 Locks and alarm  
General information on climate  
Front seats ........................................ 82  
Interior lighting.................................. 84  
Remote control with key blade......... 94  
Keyless drive (option) ....................... 98  
Locking and unlocking ................... 101  
Child safety locks ........................... 104  
Alarm (option) ................................. 105  
control .............................................. 70  
Manual climate control, A/C............. 72  
Storage spaces in the passenger  
compartment .................................... 86  
Electronic climate control,  
ECC (option)..................................... 74  
Rear seat........................................... 88  
Cargo area ........................................90  
Air distribution.................................. 77  
Fuel-driven heater (option) ............... 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Contents  
06 Starting and driving  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General........................................... 110  
Refuelling........................................ 112  
Starting the engine......................... 113  
Ignition switch and steering lock.... 114  
Keyless drive .................................. 115  
Manual gearbox.............................. 116  
Automatic gearbox ......................... 118  
All-wheel drive................................ 121  
Brake system.................................. 122  
General........................................... 148  
Tyre pressure.................................. 152  
Warning triangle and spare wheel.. 154  
Changing wheels............................ 156  
Emergency puncture repair............ 158  
Cleaning.......................................... 168  
Touching up paintwork.................... 171  
Rustproofing ................................... 172  
Stability and traction control  
system............................................ 124  
Parking assistance (option)............. 126  
Blind Spot Information System BLIS  
(option)............................................ 128  
Towing and recovery....................... 131  
Start assistance.............................. 133  
Driving with a trailer........................ 134  
Towing equipment .......................... 136  
Detachable towbar ......................... 138  
Loading........................................... 143  
Adjusting headlamp pattern ........... 144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Contents  
09 Maintenance and service  
10 Infotainment system  
11 Specifications  
Volvo service ................................... 176  
Self-maintenance ........................... 177  
Bonnet and engine compartment .. 178  
Diesel.............................................. 179  
Oils and fluids ................................ 180  
Wiper blades .................................. 185  
Battery........................................... 186  
Replacing bulbs ............................. 188  
Fuses.............................................. 194  
General ........................................... 204  
Audio functions............................... 205  
Radio functions............................... 207  
CD functions................................... 211  
Menu structure – audio system ...... 213  
Phone functions (option)................. 214  
Menu structure – phone..................221  
Type designation............................. 228  
Dimensions and weights ................ 229  
Engine specifications ..................... 230  
Engine oil........................................ 232  
Fluids and lubricants ...................... 236  
Fuel................................................. 238  
Catalytic converter ......................... 241  
Electrical system ............................ 242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Introduction  
Introduction  
Owner’s Manual  
NOTE  
A good way of getting to know your new car  
is to read the Owner’s Manual, ideally before  
your first journey. This will give you the op-  
portunity to familiarise yourself with new  
functions, to see how best to handle the car  
in different situations, and to make the best  
use of all the car’s features. Please pay at-  
tention to the safety instructions contained in  
the manual:  
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying re-  
quirements of different markets, as well as  
for national or local legal requirements and  
regulations.  
The specifications, design features and illus-  
trations in this owner’s manual are not bind-  
ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-  
tions without prior notice.  
© Volvo Car Corporation  
WARNING  
"Warning!" texts indicate where there is a  
risk of personal injury in the event of the in-  
structions not being followed.  
IMPORTANT  
"Important!" texts indicate a risk of damage  
to the car in the event of the instructions not  
being followed.  
The equipment described in the owner’s  
manual is not present in all models. In addi-  
tion to standard equipment, this manual also  
describes options (factory fitted equipment)  
and certain accessories (extra equipment).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
   
Introduction  
Volvo Cars and the environment  
Volvo Cars’ environmental philosophy  
Environmental care, safety and quality are  
the three core values which influence all op-  
erations of the Volvo Car Corporation. We  
also believe that our customers share our  
consideration for the environment.  
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is  
supplied for all Volvo models. You can now  
compare the environmental impact of differ-  
ent models and engines during the entire life-  
cycle.  
Fuel consumption  
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump-  
tion in each of their respective classes. Low-  
er fuel consumption generally results in lower  
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon di-  
oxide.  
Your Volvo complies with strict international  
environmental standards and is also manu-  
factured in one of the cleanest and most re-  
source-efficient plants in the world. Volvo  
Car Corporation has global certification to  
the ISO 14001 environmental standard,  
which supports the work within the area of  
the environment.  
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI  
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel  
consumption. For more information read un-  
der the heading Reducing environmental im-  
pact on page 9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
   
Introduction  
Volvo Cars and the environment  
3
quirements in the Öko-Tex 100 standard, a  
Efficient emission control  
Clean air in the passenger  
compartment  
A passenger compartment filter prevents  
dust and pollen from entering the passenger  
compartment via the air intake.  
major advance towards a healthier passen-  
ger compartment environment.  
Your Volvo is manufactured following the  
concept Clean inside and out – a concept  
that encompasses a clean interior environ-  
ment as well as highly efficient emission con-  
trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are  
well below the applicable standards.  
Öko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-  
pets, thread and fabrics for example. The  
leather in the upholstery undergoes chromi-  
um-free tanning with natural plant substanc-  
es and fulfils the certification requirements.  
2
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS (In-  
terior Air Quality System) ensures that the in-  
coming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic  
outside.  
In addition there is a special radiator coating,  
1
PremAir® , which can convert hazardous  
Volvo workshops and the environment  
ground-level ozone into pure oxygen when  
the ozone passes the radiator. The higher the  
ozone content in the air the more ozone is  
converted.  
The system consists of an electronic sensor  
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-  
tored continuously and if there is an increase  
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such  
as carbon monoxide then the air intake is  
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy  
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.  
Regular maintenance creates the conditions  
for long service life for the car and low fuel  
consumption, and this way you contribute to  
a cleaner environment. When Volvo’s work-  
shops are entrusted with the repair and  
maintenance of the car, it becomes part of  
our system. We make clear demands regard-  
ing the way in which our workshops are de-  
signed in order to prevent spills and dis-  
charges into the environment. Our workshop  
staff have the knowledge and the tools re-  
quired to guarantee good environmental  
care.  
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level  
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the  
carbon filter.  
Textile standard  
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be  
pleasant and comfortable, even for people  
with contact allergies and for asthma suffer-  
ers. All of our upholstery and interior textiles  
are tested with respect to certain unhealthy  
substances and allergens as well as emis-  
sions. This means that all textiles fulfil the re-  
1
Option for 5-cylinder engines.  
PremAir® is a registered trademark of  
2
3
Engelhard Corporation.  
Option  
More information on www.oekotex.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
 
Introduction  
Volvo Cars and the environment  
• Drive in the highest gear  
possible. Low engine  
speeds result in lower fuel  
consumption.  
Reducing environmental impact  
You can help reduce environmental impact,  
for example, by driving economically, by pur-  
chasing eco-labelled car care products and  
by servicing and maintaining the car accord-  
ing to the instructions in the Owner’s Manual.  
• Use engine braking to  
slow down.  
• Avoid idling. Take consideration of local  
regulations. Switch off the engine in longer  
stationary traffic.  
The following hints will help you to do your bit  
for the environment:  
• Always dispose of envi-  
ronmentally hazardous  
waste, such as batteries  
and oils, in an environ-  
mentally safe manner. If  
uncertain about disposal,  
consult an authorised  
• Decrease fuel consumption by choosing  
ECO tyre pressure, see page 152.  
• A roof load and ski box  
increase wind resist-  
ance, leading to signifi-  
cantly higher fuel  
consumption. Remove  
them immediately after  
use.  
Volvo workshop for advice.  
• Service your car regularly.  
• High speed increases consumption con-  
siderably due to increased wind resist-  
ance. A doubling of speed increases wind  
resistance four times.  
• Remove unnecessary items from the car -  
the greater the load the higher the fuel  
consumption.  
• Is your car equipped with an engine block  
heater? If so, use it for a few hours before  
starting from cold to reduce fuel con-  
sumption and exhaust emissions.  
These hints will help you to reduce your fuel  
consumption without increasing your travel  
time or lessening the enjoyment of driving.  
Apart from being kind to your car, you’ll be  
saving money - and the Earth’s resources.  
• Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
 
Seatbelts .................................................................................................. 12  
Airbag system .......................................................................................... 15  
Airbags (SRS)........................................................................................... 16  
Activating/deactivating  
the airbag (SRS) ....................................................................................... 19  
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................................................................... 21  
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................... 23  
WHIPS...................................................................................................... 24  
When the systems deploy........................................................................ 26  
Crash mode.............................................................................................. 27  
Child safety .............................................................................................. 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
SAFETY  
01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
feed the belt in by hand so that it does not  
hang lose.  
Always use a seatbelt  
WARNING  
Each belt is intended for one person only.  
The belt locks and cannot be withdrawn  
• if it is pulled out too quickly  
WARNING  
• during braking and acceleration  
• if the car leans heavily.  
Never modify or repair the belt yourself.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If  
the belt has been subjected to a major load,  
such as in a collision, the entire belt, includ-  
ing reel, anchorage and buckle, must be re-  
placed. Some of the belt’s protective  
properties may have been lost even if the  
belt does not appear damaged. The belt  
should also be replaced if it shows signs of  
wear or damage. The new belt must be  
type-approved and designed for installation  
at the same location as the replaced belt.  
It is important that the belt lies against the  
body so it can provide maximum protection.  
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The  
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal  
seating position.  
Keep in mind the following:  
• do not use clips or anything else that can  
prevent the belt from fitting properly  
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be  
positioned low down.  
• ensure the belt is not be twisted or caught  
on anything  
Heavy braking can have serious conse-  
quences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure  
that all passengers use their seatbelts.  
• the hip strap must be positioned low down  
(not over the abdomen)  
• tension the hip strap over the lap by  
pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as  
illustrated  
Putting on a seatbelt:  
– Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by  
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud  
"click" indicates that the belt has locked.  
WARNING  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
Releasing the belt  
– Press the red lock button and let the belt  
retract. If the belt does not retract fully,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
information display). The message is auto-  
matically cleared after approx. 30 seconds  
or can be acknowledged manually by  
pressing the READ button.  
Seatbelt reminder  
Seatbelts and pregnancy  
• Provide a warning if one of the rear seat-  
belts is unfastened during travel. This  
warning takes the form of a message in  
the information display along with the  
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases  
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when  
manually acknowledged by pressing the  
READ button.  
The message in the information display  
showing which belts are in use is always  
available. Press the READ button to see  
stored messages.  
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-  
ten their seatbelts through an audio and visu-  
al reminder. The audio reminder is speed-de-  
pendent. The visual reminder is located in the  
roof console and the combined instrument  
panel. At low speed, the audio reminder will  
sound for the first six seconds.  
The seatbelt should always be worn during  
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in  
the correct way. The diagonal section should  
wrap over the shoulder then be routed be-  
tween the breasts and to the side of the ab-  
domen. The lap section should lay flat over  
the thighs and as low as possible under the  
abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride  
upward. Remove all slack from the belt and  
ensure that it fits close to the body without  
any twists.  
Certain markets  
An unbelted driver will be reminded to fasten  
his or her seatbelt through an audio and visu-  
al reminder. At low speed, the audio reminder  
will sound for the first six seconds.  
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt  
reminder system.  
Rear seat  
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has  
two subfunctions:  
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers  
should adjust their seats and steering wheel  
such that they can easily maintain control of  
• Provide information on which seatbelts are  
being used in the rear seat (shown in the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
the vehicle as they drive (which means they  
must be able to easily operate the foot ped-  
als and steering wheel). Within this context,  
they should strive to position the seat with as  
large a distance as possible between their  
abdomen and the steering wheel.  
All the seatbelts (except the centre rear belt)  
are equipped with belt tensioners. A mecha-  
nism in the belt tensioner tightens the seat-  
belt around in the event of a sufficiently vio-  
lent collision. This provides more effective re-  
straint for passengers.  
Seatbelt tensioner  
Label on seatbelts with seatbelt tensioner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Airbag system  
As well as the warning sym-  
bol, a message may appear  
on the information display in  
appropriate cases. If the  
Warning symbol on the combined  
instrument panel  
warning symbol malfunc-  
tions, the warning triangle il-  
luminates and the message  
SRS AIRBAG SERVICE  
REQUIRED or SRS AIRBAG  
SERVICE URGENT appears  
in the information display. Contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop urgently.  
WARNING  
If the warning symbol for the Airbag system  
remains on or illuminates while driving, it  
means that the Airbag system is not func-  
tioning fully. The symbol indicates a fault in  
the seatbelt buckle, SIPS, SRS system or  
IC system. Contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop urgently.  
1
The airbag system is continually monitored  
by the system control module. The warning  
symbol in the combined instrument panel il-  
luminates when the ignition key is turned to  
position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after  
approx. seven seconds provided the airbag  
1
system is fault-free.  
1
Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS  
and IC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Airbags (SRS)  
Airbag (SRS) on the driver’s side  
Passenger airbag (SRS)  
WARNING  
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag  
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as  
possible with their feet on the floor and  
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must  
be secured.  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
1
bag (SRS) is activated.  
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of  
the front passenger seat. No one shorter  
than 140 cm should sit in the front passen-  
ger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental  
Restraint System) to supplement the protec-  
tion afforded by the seatbelt. The passenger  
airbag is fitted behind a panel above the  
glovebox. This panel is marked SRS  
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental  
Restraint System) in the steering wheel to  
supplement the protection afforded by the  
seatbelt. This airbag is fitted into the centre  
of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is  
marked SRS AIRBAG.  
1
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 19.  
AIRBAG.  
WARNING  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
1
Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS).  
This can be unselected when the car is or-  
dered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Airbags (SRS)  
SRS system  
NOTE  
The sensors react differently depending on  
the course of the collision and whether the  
seatbelts on the driver and passenger side  
are used. It is therefore possible that only  
one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a  
collision. The SRS system senses the force  
of the collision on the car and adapts ac-  
cordingly so that one or more airbags is de-  
ployed.  
NOTE  
The airbags have a function whereby their  
capacities are adapted to the collision force  
to which the car is subjected.  
SRS system, left-hand drive.  
SRS system, right-hand drive.  
The system consists of airbags and sensors.  
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sen-  
sors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot  
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag de-  
flates when compressed. When this occurs,  
smoke escapes into the car. This is com-  
pletely normal. The entire process, including  
inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs  
within tenths of a second.  
WARNING  
Any repair must only be performed by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Any interference in the SRS system could  
cause malfunction and result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Airbags (SRS)  
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand  
drive and right-hand drive cars  
WARNING  
Never interfere with SRS components in the  
steering wheel or the panel above the  
glovebox.  
Objects and accessories must not be posi-  
tioned or glued on or near the SRS AIR-  
BAG panel (above the glovebox) or in the  
area affected by a deployed airbag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
01 Safety  
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)  
WARNING  
01  
Activating/deactivating  
PACOS (option)  
Activated airbag (passenger seat):  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion on the front passenger  
seat when the airbag is activated. This ap-  
plies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.  
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):  
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in  
the front passenger seat when the airbag is  
deactivated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger life.  
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag  
(SRS) is deactivated.  
Switch for PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off  
Switch).  
The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat  
can be deactivated using a switch. This is  
necessary if a child seat is to be fitted there  
for example.  
The switch is located on the passenger end  
of the dashboard and is accessible when the  
passenger door is open. Check that the  
switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-  
ommends that that the ignition key be used  
to change position (Other items with a shape  
similar to a key can be used).  
Indicator  
A text message on the roof panel indicates  
that the passenger airbag (SRS) is  
deactivated.  
WARNING  
If the car is equipped with a front passenger  
airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS,  
the airbag will always be activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)  
Switch position  
Switch for SRS in OFF position.  
Switch for SRS in ON position.  
OFF = Airbag (SRS) is deactivated. With the  
switch in this position, children in a child seat  
or on a booster cushion can sit in the front  
passenger seat, but never persons taller  
than 140 cm.  
ON = Airbag (SRS) activated. With the switch  
in this position, persons taller than 140 cm  
can sit in the front passenger seat, but never  
children in a child seat or on a booster  
cushion.  
WARNING  
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-  
senger seat if the text message in the roof  
panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is de-  
activated and if the warning symbol for the  
AIRBAG system is also displayed on the  
combined instrument panel. This indicates  
that there has been a severe malfunction.  
Visit an authorised Volvo workshop  
urgently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Side airbags (SIPS bags)  
Side airbags – SIPS bags  
WARNING  
Do not put objects in the area between the  
outside of the seat and the door panel,  
since this area is required by the side air-  
bag.  
WARNING  
Use only Volvo genuine car seat covers, or  
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat  
covers may impede the operation of the  
side air bags.  
Child seats and side airbags  
The side airbag does not diminish the protec-  
tion provided by the car to children seated in  
a child seat or on a booster cushion.  
Side airbag locations.  
Inflated side airbag.  
A large proportion of the collision force is  
transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protec-  
tion System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the  
roof and other structural parts of the body.  
The side airbags at the driver’s and front pas-  
senger seats protect the chest area and are  
an important part of the SIPS. The side air-  
bags are located in the front seat backrests.  
A child seat or booster cushion can be  
placed on the front passenger seat provided  
that the car does not have an activated pas-  
senger airbag.  
WARNING  
Side airbags are a supplement to the SIPS  
system. Always wear a seatbelt.  
1
WARNING  
Repairs must only be performed by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop.  
Work on the SIPS system can cause mal-  
function and result in serious personal  
injury.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Side airbags (SIPS bags)  
SIPS bags  
Passenger side  
Driver’s side  
The SIPS bag system consists of side air-  
bags and sensors. A sufficiently violent colli-  
sion trips the sensors and the side airbags  
are inflated. The airbag inflates between the  
occupant and the door panel and thereby  
cushions the initial impact while deflating.  
The side airbag is normally only deployed on  
the side of the collision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
01 Safety  
01  
Inflatable Curtain (IC)  
Properties  
The inflatable curtain, IC (Inflatable Curtain),  
is a supplement to the SIPS system. It is fit-  
ted in the headlining along both sides of the  
roof and protects both front and rear seat  
passengers. The inflatable curtain is activat-  
ed by sensors in the event of a sufficiently vi-  
olent collision and the inflatable curtain in-  
flates. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent  
the driver and passengers from striking their  
heads on the inside of the car during a colli-  
sion.  
WARNING  
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm  
under the top edge of the side windows.  
Otherwise, the intended protection of the  
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the  
headlining, may be compromised.  
WARNING  
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the  
handles in the roof. The hook is only de-  
signed for light clothing (not for solid ob-  
jects such as umbrellas for example).  
Do not screw or fit anything to the headlin-  
ing, door pillars or side panels. This could  
compromise the intended protection. Only  
use Volvo genuine parts that are approved  
for placement in these areas.  
WARNING  
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the  
seatbelts.  
Always use a seatbelt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
     
01 Safety  
01  
WHIPS  
Protection against whiplash injury –  
WHIPS  
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS)  
consists of energy absorbing backrests and  
specially designed head restraints for the  
front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-  
end collision, where the angle and speed of  
the collision, and the nature of the colliding  
vehicle all have an influence.  
Properties of the seat  
WHIPS system and child seats/  
booster cushions  
The WHIPS system does not diminish the  
protection provided by the car to children  
seated in a child seat or on a booster cush-  
ion.  
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the  
front seat backrests fall backward to alter the  
position of the driver and front seat passen-  
ger. This diminishes the risk of whiplash  
injury.  
Correct seating position  
WARNING  
WARNING  
For the best possible protection, the driver  
and front seat passenger should sit in the  
centre of the seat with as little space as pos-  
sible between the head and the head re-  
straint.  
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS  
system yourself. Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the  
seatbelts. Always wear your seatbelt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
       
01 Safety  
01  
WHIPS  
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system  
WARNING  
If a seat has been subjected to extreme  
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,  
the WHIPS system must be checked by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Part of the WHIPS system’s protective ca-  
pacity may have been lost even if the seat  
appears to be undamaged.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the system checked after even a minor  
rear-end collision.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the  
corresponding front seat must be moved  
forward so that it does not touch the folded  
backrest.  
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the  
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-  
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the  
function of the WHIPS system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
01 Safety  
01  
When the systems deploy  
System  
Triggered  
Seatbelt tensioner  
Airbags (SRS)  
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning.  
1
In a frontal collision .  
1
Side airbags (SIPS)  
Inflatable Curtain IC  
Whiplash protection WHIPS  
1
In a side-impact accident .  
1
In a side-impact accident .  
In a rear-end collision.  
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the  
speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.  
If the airbags have been deployed, the fol-  
lowing is recommended:  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The AIRBAG control module is located in  
the centre console. If the centre console is  
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-  
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to  
start the car since the airbags may deploy.  
Have the car transported to an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
Never drive with deployed airbags. They  
can make steering difficult. Other safety  
systems may also be damaged. The smoke  
and dust created when the airbags are de-  
ployed can cause skin and eye irritation  
after intensive exposure. In case of irrita-  
tion, wash with cold water. The rapid de-  
ployment sequence and airbag fabric may  
cause friction and skin burns.  
• Have the car transported to an authorised  
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with de-  
ployed airbags.  
• Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace  
components in the car’s safety system.  
• Always contact a doctor.  
NOTE  
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-  
tems are deployed only once during a colli-  
sion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Crash mode  
If everything seems normal and you have  
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you  
may attempt to start the car.  
Driving after a collision  
WARNING  
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to  
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the  
CRASH MODE message is displayed.  
Leave the car at once.  
Firstly, remove the ignition key and then rein-  
sert it. The car’s electronics will then try to re-  
set themselves to normal mode. Then try to  
start the car. If CRASH MODE is still shown  
in the display then the car must not be driven  
or towed. Even if the car appears to be drive-  
able, hidden damage may make the car im-  
possible to control once moving.  
WARNING  
If the car is in CRASH MODE it must not be  
towed. It must be transported to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
Moving the car  
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH  
MODE has been reset, the car can be moved  
carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not  
move the car further than necessary.  
If the car is involved in a collision, the text  
CRASH MODE - SEE MANUAL may appear  
on the information display. This means that  
the car has reduced functionality. Crash  
mode is a protective state that is enforced  
when the collision may have damaged the  
car’s vital functions, such as the fuel lines,  
sensors for one of the safety systems, or the  
brake system.  
WARNING  
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the  
electronics yourself if the car has been in  
crash mode. This could result in personal  
injury or the car not functioning as normal.  
Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop  
to check and restore the car to Normal  
mode after CRASH MODE has been dis-  
played.  
Attempting to start the car  
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the  
car. There should be no smell of fuel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Children should sit comfortably and  
safely  
Child seats and airbags  
The position of a child in the car and the  
choice of equipment is dictated by the child’s  
weight and size. For more information see  
page 30.  
NOTE  
Regulations regarding the placement of  
children in cars vary from country to coun-  
try. Check what laws apply.  
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit  
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a  
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.  
Location of airbag decal in door opening on front  
passenger side.  
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.  
Volvo’s own child safety equipment is de-  
signed for your car. Use Volvo genuine  
equipment to best ensure that the mounting  
points and attachments are correctly posi-  
tioned and are sufficiently strong.  
Always place a child in the rear seat if the  
1
passenger airbag is activated . A child in a  
WARNING  
child seat on the front passenger seat may  
suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
1
bag (SRS) is activated . Failure to follow  
You may place:  
WARNING  
this advice can endanger the life of the  
child.  
• a child seat or booster cushion on the  
front passenger seat, provided the pas-  
Persons shorter than 140 cm may only sit in  
the front passenger seat if the passenger  
airbag is deactivated.  
1
1
senger airbag is not activated .  
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS), see page 19.  
• a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that  
uses the back of the front seat as support.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 19.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
       
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Decal located on instrument panel end face.  
Decal located on instrument panel end face  
(Australia only).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Placement of children in the car  
1
Weight/age  
Outer rear seat  
Centre rear seat  
Front seat  
<10 kg  
(0–9 months)  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective  
cushion between the child seat and the  
dashboard.  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
2
2
2
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
9–18 kg  
(9–36 months)  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective  
cushion between the child seat and the  
dashboard.  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
Rear-facing child seat, secured with  
seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
2
2
2
L : Type approval no. E5 03135  
15–36 kg  
(3–12 years)  
Booster cushion with or without  
backrest.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
Booster cushion with or without  
backrest.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
Booster cushion with or without  
backrest.  
L : Type approval no. E5 03139  
2
2
2
3
Integrated booster cushion .  
2
L : Type approval no. E5 03168  
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 19.  
2
3
L: Suitable for certain child seats as listed in the specified type approval. Child seats can be vehicle-specific, limited, semi-universal or universal.  
Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
     
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Raising the booster cushion  
Integrated booster cushion (option)  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
bag (SRS) is activated.  
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit  
in the front passenger seat if the airbag  
1
(SRS) is activated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag  
(SRS), see page 19.  
– Pull that handle to raise the booster  
cushion (1).  
Volvo’s integrated booster cushion for the  
outer rear seats is specially designed to pro-  
vide optimum safety for children. Combined  
with the regular seatbelts, the booster cush-  
ion is approved for children weighing be-  
tween 15 and 36 kg.  
– Grasp the cushion with both hands and  
push it backwards (2).  
– Push until it locks in place (3).  
WARNING  
The booster cushion must be in the locked  
position before the child is placed there.  
Check that:  
• the booster cushion in locked in position.  
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child’s  
body and is not slack or twisted, and that  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
   
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
the belt is positioned correctly across the  
shoulder.  
Lowering the booster cushion  
• the hip strap is low across the hips for  
optimum protection.  
• the seatbelt does not lie across the child’s  
throat or below the shoulder  
• carefully adjust the position of the head  
restraint to suit the child.  
WARNING  
Repair or replacement should only be per-  
formed by an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Do not make any modifications or additions  
to the booster cushion.  
If an integrated booster cushion has been  
subjected to a major load, such as in con-  
junction with a collision, the entire booster  
cushion must be replaced. Even if the  
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,  
it may not afford the same level of protec-  
tion. The booster cushion must also be re-  
placed if it is heavily worn.  
– Pull the handle (1).  
– Lower the seat and press until it locks (2).  
NOTE  
Remember to stow away the booster cush-  
ion before lowering the rear seat backrest.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
 
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Fitting a child seat  
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats  
(option)  
Volvo has child safety products that are de-  
signed for and tested by Volvo.  
WARNING  
Never place the child seat in the front seat if  
the car is equipped with an activated front  
passenger airbag. If problems arise when  
fitting child safety products, contact the  
manufacturer for clearer instructions.  
1
WARNING  
Booster cushions/child seats with steel  
braces or some other design that could rest  
on the seatbelt buckle’s opening button  
must not be used, as they could cause the  
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.  
Do not allow the upper section of the child  
seat to rest against the windscreen.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag  
(SRS), see page 19.  
When using other child safety products avail-  
able on the market it is important to read the  
installation instructions included with the  
product.  
The outer rear seats have ISOFIX attachment  
points. Contact a Volvo dealer for further in-  
formation on child safety equipment.  
• Do not attach the straps for the child seat  
to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs,  
rails or beams under the seat. Sharp  
edges can damage the straps.  
• Allow the back of the child seat to rest  
against the dashboard. This applies to  
cars without a passenger airbag or where  
the airbag is deactivated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
Overview, left-hand drive cars.................................................................. 36  
Overview, right-hand drive cars ............................................................... 38  
Driver’s door control panel....................................................................... 40  
Combined instrument panel..................................................................... 41  
Indicator and warning symbols................................................................ 42  
Information display................................................................................... 46  
Electrical socket and switches on centre console................................... 47  
Lighting panel........................................................................................... 48  
Left-hand stalk switch.............................................................................. 50  
Right-hand stalk switch ........................................................................... 52  
Cruise control (option).............................................................................. 54  
Steering wheel keypad (option)................................................................ 55  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers .............................. 56  
Parking brake, electrical socket ............................................................... 57  
Power windows........................................................................................ 58  
Rearview and door mirrors....................................................................... 60  
Power sunroof (option) ............................................................................. 64  
Personal preferences ............................................................................... 66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, left-hand drive cars  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, left-hand drive cars  
1. Steering wheel adjustment  
2. Bonnet release  
26.Climate control  
27.Gear lever  
02  
3. Control panel  
28.Hazard warning flashers  
29.Door handle  
4. Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer  
5. Lighting, fuel filler flap opener  
6. Door handle, lock button.  
7. Air vents in dashboard  
30.Glovebox  
31.Parking brake  
32.Electrical socket/cigarette lighter  
33.Blind Spot Information System, BLIS  
34.Switch, optional equipment  
8. Air vent for side window  
9. Cruise control  
10.Horn, airbag  
11.Combined instrument panel  
12.Keypad for infotainment system  
13.Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp washers  
14.Ignition switch  
15.Sunroof controls  
16.No function  
17.Deactivation of alarm detectors, deadlocks  
18.Switch for interior lighting  
19.Reading lamp, left-hand side  
20.Reading lamp, right-hand side  
21.Seatbelt reminder  
22.Interior rearview mirror  
23.Display for climate control and infotainment system  
24.Infotainment system  
25.Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal  
preferences  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, right-hand drive cars  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, right-hand drive cars  
1. Switch, optional equipment  
2. Blind Spot Information System, BLIS  
3. Electrical socket, cigarette lighter  
4. Parking brake  
26.Combined instrument panel  
27.Horn, airbag  
02  
28.Keypad for infotainment system  
29.Hazard warning flashers  
30.Door handle, lock button  
31.Lighting, fuel filler flap opener  
32.Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer  
33.Bonnet release  
5. Control panel  
6. Glovebox  
7. Door handle  
8. Air vent for side window  
9. Air vents in dashboard  
10.Gear lever  
34.Steering wheel adjustment  
11.Climate control  
12.Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal  
preferences  
13.Infotainment system  
14.Display for climate control and infotainment system  
15.Interior rearview mirror  
16.Seatbelt reminder  
17.Switch for interior lighting  
18.Reading lamp, left-hand side  
19.Reading lamp, right-hand side  
20.No function  
21.Deactivation of alarm detectors, deadlocks  
22.Sunroof controls  
23.Ignition switch  
24.Windscreen wipers and washers, headlamp washers  
25.Cruise control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
02 Instruments and controls  
Driver’s door control panel  
Driver’s door control panel  
02  
1. Blocking switch for rear power windows  
(standard)  
Electric child locks (option)  
2. Power windows  
3. Door mirror, left-hand side  
4. Door mirrors, setting  
5. Door mirror, right-hand side  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Combined instrument panel  
02  
1. Speedometer.  
6. Direction indicator, right.  
12.Main beam indicator.  
2. Direction indicators, left.  
3. Warning symbol.  
7. Tachometer â€“ Indicates engine speed  
in thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
13.Knob for clock – Turn the knob to  
adjust the time.  
14.Temperature gauge – Displays the tem-  
perature of the engine cooling system.  
A message will appear on the display if  
the temperature becomes too high and  
the gauge goes into the red zone. Bear  
in mind that extra lights placed in front  
of the air intake, for example, reduce  
the cooling capacity at high outside  
temperatures and high engine loads.  
4. Information display – The display  
presents information and warning mes-  
sages, outside temperature and the  
time. When the ambient temperature is  
between +2 °C and –5 °C, a snowflake  
symbol appears on the display. This  
warns of icy roads. The outside tem-  
perature gauge may show a slightly  
high reading after the car has been  
stationary.  
8. Indicator and information symbols.  
9. Fuel gauge.  
10.Button for trip meter – Used to measure  
short distances. Press the button to  
switch between trip meters T1 and T2.  
Press and hold (more than 2 seconds)  
to zero the active trip meter.  
11.Display – Display for automatic gear  
position, rain sensor, odometer, trip  
meter and cruise control.  
15.Indicator and warning symbols.  
5. Information symbol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
– Rectify the fault as instructed or contact  
an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Functionality check, symbols  
Symbols in the centre of the  
instrument panel  
1
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate  
when the ignition key is turned to position II  
before starting. This is to check that the sym-  
bols are working. When the engine starts, all  
the symbols should go out except the hand-  
brake symbol, which extinguishes when the  
handbrake is released.  
02  
When one of the car’s systems  
does not behave as intended,  
the yellow information symbol il-  
luminates and a text appears in  
the display. The message text is  
cleared using the READ button, see page 46,  
or disappears automatically after two min-  
utes.  
If the engine does not start  
within five seconds, all sym-  
bols extinguish except the sym-  
bols for a fault in the car’s emis-  
sions system and for low oil  
The yellow information symbol can also  
come on in conjunction with other symbols.  
NOTE  
pressure. Certain symbols may  
have no function, depending on  
the car’s specifications.  
When the message text TIME FOR  
REGULAR SERVICE is shown, the symbol  
lamp and message text are cleared using  
the READ button, or disappear automati-  
cally after two minutes.  
The red warning symbol illumi-  
nates when a fault has been in-  
dicated which could affect the  
safety and/or driveability of the  
car. An explanatory text is  
shown on the information display at the same  
time. The symbol and message text are visi-  
ble until the fault has been rectified. The  
warning symbol can also illuminate in con-  
junction with other symbols.  
– Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car  
further.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low  
oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given  
via display text, see page 180.  
– Read the information on the information  
display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
– Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the ABS checked if the symbol re-  
mains lit.  
Indicator symbols – left-hand side  
02  
3. Rear fog lamp  
This symbol is lit when the rear  
fog lamp is on.  
4. Stability system STC or DSTC  
For information on the system’s  
functions and symbols, see  
page 124.  
5. No function  
6. Engine preheater (diesel)  
This symbol is lit during engine  
preheating. Preheating occurs  
when the temperature is below  
–2 °C. The car can be started  
once the symbol goes out.  
1. Fault in car’s emissions system  
Drive to an authorised Volvo  
workshop to have the system  
checked.  
2. ABS fault  
7. Low level in fuel tank  
If this symbol lights, the system  
is not working. The car’s regular  
brake system continues to work,  
but without the ABS function.  
This symbol illuminates when  
there are approximately 8 litres  
of usable fuel left in a petrol-en-  
gined car, or approximately  
7 litres in a diesel-engined car.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
– Restart the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
               
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
2. Parking brake applied  
5. Seatbelt reminder  
This symbol lights if someone in  
Indicator symbols – right-hand side  
The lamp comes on when the  
parking brake is applied. Always  
pull the parking brake lever to the  
end position.  
02  
a front seat has not put on their  
seatbelt or if someone in a rear  
seat has taken off their seatbelt.  
NOTE  
6. Alternator not charging  
If this symbol lights while driving,  
a fault has occurred in the elec-  
trical system. Contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
The lamp illuminates irrespective of how  
hard the parking brake is applied.  
3. Airbags – SRS  
If this symbol remains on or  
7. Fault in brake system  
comes on while driving, it means  
a fault has been detected in the  
seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC  
system. Drive directly to an authorised Volvo  
workshop to have the system checked.  
If this symbol lights, the brake  
fluid level may be too low.  
1. Indicator symbol for trailer  
This symbol flashes when the di-  
rection indicators are used and a  
trailer is coupled. If the symbol  
does not flash, one of the lamps  
on the trailer or the car is defective.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and check the  
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see  
page 183. If the level in the reservoir is  
below MIN, the car should not be driven  
any further. Have the car transported to an  
authorised Volvo workshop to have the  
brake system checked.  
1
4. Low oil pressure  
If this symbol lights up while driv-  
ing, the engine oil pressure is too  
low. Stop the engine immediately  
and check the engine oil level,  
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols  
illuminate at the same time, there  
may be a fault in the brake force  
distribution system.  
top up if necessary. If the symbol lights up  
and the oil level is normal, contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low  
oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given  
via display text, see page 180.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
   
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
• Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
Reminder – doors not closed  
1
If one of the doors, the bonnet or the tailgate  
is not properly closed, the driver will be re-  
minded of this.  
02  
• Restart the engine.  
• If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-  
ing.  
Low speed  
• If the symbols remain on, check the level  
in the brake fluid reservoir. See page 183.  
If the car moves at a speed less  
than approx. 7 km/h, the infor-  
mation symbol illuminates at the  
same time as DRIVER DOOR  
OPEN, PASSENGER DOOR  
OPEN, LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN, BONNET  
OPEN or RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN is  
shown in the display. Stop the car safely as  
soon as possible and close the door or bon-  
net.  
• If the brake fluid level is normal but the  
symbols are still lit, the car can be driven,  
with great care, to an authorised Volvo  
workshop to have the brake system  
checked.  
• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN  
then the car should not be driven any  
further. Have the car transported to an  
authorised Volvo workshop to have the  
brake system checked.  
High speed  
If the car is moving faster than  
approx. 7 km/h, the symbol illu-  
minates and one of the texts in-  
dicated in the previous para-  
graph appears in the display.  
WARNING  
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the  
same time, there is a risk that the rear end  
will skid during heavy braking.  
Tailgate reminder  
If the tailgate is open, this infor-  
mation symbol will illuminate and  
TAILGATE OPEN will appear on  
the display.  
1
Only cars with alarm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
 
02 Instruments and controls  
Information display  
When a warning or indicator symbol come, a  
message appears on the information display.  
Messages  
02  
– Press the READ button (1).  
Switch between messages with the READ  
button. Fault messages are stored in the  
memory until the fault is rectified.  
NOTE  
If a warning message appears while you are  
using the trip computer, the message must  
be read (press READ) before the previous  
activity can be resumed.  
Message  
Specification  
STOP SAFELY  
STOP ENGINE  
SERVICE URGENT  
SEE MANUAL  
Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.  
Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.  
Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.  
Read the owner’s manual.  
SERVICE REQUIRED  
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE  
Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.  
Time for regular service at an authorised Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of  
kilometres driven, number of months since the last service and engine running time.  
CHECK OIL LEVEL  
Check the oil level. The message is shown every 10 000 km (certain engine variants). For information  
on checking the oil level, see page 181.  
SOOT FILTER FULL – SEE MANUAL  
STC/DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF  
Diesel particle filter requires regeneration, see page 113.  
The function of the stability and traction control system is reduced, see page 125 for more variants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Electrical socket and switches on centre console  
12 V electrical socket  
Cigarette lighter (option)  
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.  
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.  
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the  
heated coils.  
02  
Extra equipment  
Space for an extra switch for retrofitted  
equipment.  
Electrical socket, BLIS and extra equipment  
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V  
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers  
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A.  
For the socket to supply current, the ignition  
key must be in at least position I.  
WARNING  
Always leave the plug in the socket when  
the socket is not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Lighting panel  
Headlamp levelling  
Headlamps  
The load in the car changes the vertical align-  
ment of the headlamp beam, which could  
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by ad-  
justing the height of the beam.  
02  
Automatic dipped beam (certain  
countries)  
Dipped beam comes on automatically when  
the ignition key is turned to position II, ex-  
cept when the headlamp control (2) is in the  
centre position. If necessary, the automatic  
dipped beam can be deactivated by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop.  
– Turn the ignition key to position II.  
– Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the  
end positions.  
– Roll the control (1) up or down respective-  
ly to raise or lower beam alignment.  
1
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps have auto-  
Automatic dipped beam, main beam  
– Turn the ignition key to position II.  
– Dipped beam is activated by means of  
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise  
to the end position.  
matic headlamp levelling, so there is no  
control (1).  
Position/parking lamps  
Position/parking lamps can be switched on  
irrespective of ignition key position.  
Position Specification  
– Main beam is activated by means of mov-  
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the  
steering wheel to the end position and  
releasing it, see page 50.  
Automatic/deactivated dipped  
beam. Only main beam flash.  
– Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre  
position.  
Position/parking lamps  
When the ignition key is in position II the po-  
sition/parking lamps and number plate light-  
ing are always on.  
The lamps are switched off automatically  
when the ignition key is turned to position  
I or 0.  
Automatic dipped beam. Main  
beam and main beam flash  
work in this position.  
Instrument lighting  
The instrument lighting is switched on when  
the ignition key is in position II and the head-  
lamp control (2) is in one of the end positions.  
The lighting is automatically dimmed during  
1
Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
               
02 Instruments and controls  
Lighting panel  
the day and can be controlled manually at  
night.  
Rear fog lamp  
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on  
with the headlamps or the front fog lamps.  
02  
– Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter  
or dimmer lighting.  
– Press the button (6).  
Enhanced display lighting  
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the  
combined instrument panel and the light in  
the button (6) illuminate when the rear fog  
lamp is switched on.  
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,  
clock and outside temperature gauge, these  
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when  
the key is removed from the ignition switch.  
The displays extinguish when the car is  
locked.  
Fuel filler flap  
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap  
when the car is unlocked, see page 101.  
Fog lamp  
NOTE  
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from  
country to country.  
Front fog lamps (option)  
The front fog lamps can be switched on  
along with the headlamps or the position  
lamps/parking lamps.  
– Press the button (4).  
The light in the button (4) illuminates when  
the front fog lamps are switched on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Left-hand stalk switch  
– Move the stalk switch towards the steer-  
ing wheel to the end position (4) and re-  
lease.  
Short flash sequence  
– Move the stalk switch up or down to  
position (1) and release.  
Stalk switch positions  
02  
– Get out of the car and lock the door.  
The direction indicators flash three times and  
the stalk switch returns to its home position.  
Switching, main and dipped beam  
The ignition key must be in position II for  
main beam to be switched on.  
– Turn the headlamp control clockwise to  
the end position, see page 48.  
– Move the stalk switch towards the steer-  
ing wheel to the end position (4) and re-  
lease.  
Main beam flash  
1. Short flash sequence, direction indicators  
– Move the stalk switch gently towards the  
steering wheel to position (3).  
2. Continuous flash sequence, direction  
indicators  
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is  
released.  
3. Main beam flash  
4. Switching, main and dipped beam, and  
home safe lighting  
Home safe lighting  
Some exterior lights can be kept lit and serve  
as home safe lighting after the car is locked.  
Direction indicators  
1
The standard delay is 30 seconds , but can  
Continuous flash sequence  
– Move the stalk switch up or down to end  
position (2).  
be changed to 60 or 90 seconds; see  
page 67.  
– Remove the key from the ignition switch.  
The stalk switch remains in its end position  
and is moved back manually, or automatical-  
ly by steering wheel movement.  
1
Factory settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
             
02 Instruments and controls  
Left-hand stalk switch  
Functions  
AVERAGE  
Trip computer (option)  
The trip computer displays the following in-  
formation:  
The average fuel consumption since the last  
reset (RESET). The average fuel consump-  
tion is stored when the ignition is switched  
off and remains until the function is reset. Re-  
set using the RESET button (C).  
02  
• AVERAGE SPEED  
1
• ACTUAL SPEED MPH  
• INSTANTANEOUS  
NOTE  
• AVERAGE  
• KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK  
• STC/DSTC, see page 124  
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
a fuel-driven heater is used.  
AVERAGE SPEED  
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK  
The range to empty is calculated based on  
the average fuel consumption over the last  
30 km. When the range to empty is shorter  
than 20 km then "----" is shown on the  
display.  
When the ignition is switched off, the average  
speed is stored and used as the basis of the  
new value when you continue driving. Reset  
using the RESET button (C).  
Controls  
1
ACTUAL SPEED MPH  
To scroll through trip computer information,  
turn the thumbwheel (B) in steps, either up-  
ward or downward. Continue turning to re-  
turn to the starting point.  
Current speed is displayed in mph.  
NOTE  
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
fuel consumption is changed due to a  
change in driving style or if a fuel-driven  
heater is used for example.  
INSTANTANEOUS  
Current fuel consumption is calculated every  
second. The information on the display is up-  
dated every couple of seconds. When the car  
is stationary, "----" appears on the display.  
NOTE  
If a warning message interrupts while you  
are using the trip computer, this message  
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by  
pressing the READ button (A) and revert to  
the trip computer function.  
2
Resetting  
– Select AVERAGE SPEED or AVERAGE  
During the period for regeneration fuel con-  
sumption may increase, see page 113.  
– Press and hold the RESET button (C) for  
at least five seconds to reset the average  
speed and average consumption at the  
same time.  
1
Certain countries.  
2
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
         
02 Instruments and controls  
Right-hand stalk switch  
Single sweep  
High-pressure headlamp washing  
(option in certain markets)  
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes  
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,  
the headlamps are washed as follows.  
Windscreen wipers  
Raise the stalk switch to make a  
single sweep.  
02  
Intermittent wiping  
The delay between sweeps can  
be adjusted. Turn the  
thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter  
interval between sweeps. Turn it down to in-  
crease the delay.  
Dipped beam selected with the switch on  
lighting panel:  
The headlamps are washed the first time the  
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten  
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash of  
the windscreen. If more than ten minutes  
passes between washes, the headlamps are  
washed every time.  
Continuous wiping  
The wipers sweep at normal  
speed.  
Parking/position lamps selected with  
The wipers sweep at high  
speed.  
the switch on the lighting panel  
• Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed  
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the  
time that elapses.  
A. Windscreen and headlamp washers  
B. Rain sensor – On/Off  
C. Thumbwheel  
IMPORTANT  
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.  
D. No function  
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers  
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-  
screen must be wet when the windscreen  
wipers are operating.  
The switch on the lighting panel is in  
position 0  
• Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed  
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the  
time that elapses.  
Windscreen wipers off  
The windscreen wipers are off  
when the stalk switch is in  
position 0.  
Windscreen/headlamp washer  
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.  
Pull the stalk switch towards the steering  
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp  
washers. The wipers will make three more  
sweeps once the stalk is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
           
02 Instruments and controls  
Right-hand stalk switch  
Activating the rain sensor:  
Rain sensor (option)  
– Press the button (B). A display symbol  
shows that the rain sensor is active.  
02  
To turn the rain sensor off, either:  
– Press button (B)  
– Press the stalk switch downward to anoth-  
er wiper program. If the stalk switch is  
raised, the rain sensor will remain active,  
the wipers make an extra sweep and then  
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk  
is released to position 0.  
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated  
when the key is removed from the ignition  
switch or five minutes after the ignition is  
switched off.  
The rain sensor automatically activates the  
windscreen wipers based on how much wa-  
ter it detects on the windscreen. The sensitiv-  
ity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using  
the thumbwheel (C).  
IMPORTANT  
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the  
rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while  
the ignition key is in position I or II. Other-  
wise, the windscreen wipers could start  
swiping and become damaged.  
Turn the thumbwheel clockwise for higher  
sensitivity and anticlockwise for lower sensi-  
tivity. (An extra sweep is made when the  
thumbwheel is turned clockwise.)  
Thumbwheel  
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency  
of sweeps when intermittent wiping is select-  
ed, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain  
sensor is selected.  
On/Off  
When activating the rain sensor, the ignition  
key must be in position I or II and the wind-  
screen wiper stalk switch must be in  
position 0.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
 
02 Instruments and controls  
Cruise control (option)  
Activating  
Increasing or decreasing speed  
Temporary disengagement  
– Press 0 to disengage the cruise control  
temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the  
combined instrument panel. The speed  
set earlier is stored in the memory.  
02  
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-  
gaged when:  
• the brake pedal or clutch pedal is de-  
pressed  
• speed falls below 25–30 km/h when trav-  
1
elling uphill  
• the gear selector is moved to position N  
• wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs.  
• a temporary increase in speed lasts longer  
than one minute.  
– Increase or decrease the locked speed by  
pressing and holding + or –. The speed of  
the car when the button is released is set  
as the new speed.  
The controls for cruise control are to the left  
of the steering wheel.  
Return to the set speed  
– Press this button to resume  
the previously set speed.  
CRUISE ON appears on the  
combined instrument panel.  
Setting the desired speed:  
Pressing (less than half a second) + or –  
– Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is  
shown on the combined instrument panel.  
1
changes the speed 1 km/h or 1.6 km/h .  
– Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed.  
CRUISE-ON appears on the combined  
instrument panel.  
NOTE  
Disengaging  
A temporary increase in speed (less than  
one minute) using the accelerator, such as  
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise  
control setting. When you release the accel-  
erator, the car will return to the pro-  
grammed speed.  
– Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise  
control. CRUISE ON goes out on the com-  
bined instrument panel.  
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds  
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.  
1
Depending on engine type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Steering wheel keypad (option)  
Button functions  
02  
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering  
wheel keypad control the radio and the  
phone. The function of a button depends on  
which system is active. The steering wheel  
keypad can be used to scroll between preset  
stations, change CD tracks and adjust the  
volume.  
– Press and hold one of the arrow keys to  
fast forward/reverse or search for the next  
station.  
The phone must be switched on to adjust au-  
dio system settings. It must be activated with  
the ENTER key to enable control of the  
phone functions with the arrow keys.  
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Hazard warning flashers  
02  
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction  
indicators flash) when the car is stopped  
where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruc-  
tion. Press the button to activate the  
function.  
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both  
height and reach.  
– Pull the lever towards you to release the  
steering wheel.  
–
Adjust the steering wheel to the position  
that suits you best.  
NOTE  
– Push back the lever to fix the steering  
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the  
steering wheel lightly at the same time as  
you push the lever back.  
Regulations regarding the use of hazard  
warning flashers vary from country to coun-  
try.  
WARNING  
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,  
never while driving. Before driving, check  
that the steering wheel is fixed in position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Parking brake, electrical socket  
– If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever  
must be pulled more firmly.  
Parking brake (handbrake)  
Electrical socket in the rear seat  
02  
When parking a vehicle always put the gear  
selector in 1st gear (for manual transmission)  
or P (for automatic transmission).  
Parking on a hill  
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the  
wheels away from the kerb.  
If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the  
wheels toward the kerb.  
How to release the parking brake  
– Press the foot brake down firmly.  
– Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,  
press the button, release the parking  
brake lever and release the button.  
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V  
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers  
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A.  
For the socket to supply current, the ignition  
key must be in at least position I.  
The lever is located between the front seats.  
NOTE  
The warning lamp symbol in the combined  
instrument panel comes on irrespective of  
how hard the parking brake is applied.  
WARNING  
Always leave the plug in the socket when it  
is not in use.  
How to Apply the parking brake  
– Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
– Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to  
its full extent.  
Cigarette lighter (option)  
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.  
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.  
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the  
heated coils.  
– Release the foot brake pedal and make  
sure that the car is at a standstill position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
         
02 Instruments and controls  
Power windows  
will then open or close automatically. If the  
window is obstructed by an object, the  
movement will stop.  
Operation  
Driver’s door  
The power windows are operated using the  
controls in the doors. The ignition key must  
be in position I and II for the power windows  
to operate. The windows continue to work for  
a limited time when the car is stationary and  
ignition key is removed, provided none of the  
doors is opened. Operate the windows with  
caution.  
02  
WARNING  
The function that interrupts the movement  
of the windows in the event of blocking  
works with both automatic and manual  
closing, although not with pinch protection  
deployed.  
To open a window:  
WARNING  
–
Depress the front of the control.  
If there are children in the car:  
To close a window:  
Remember to switch off the supply to the  
power windows by removing the ignition  
key if the driver leaves the car.  
Make sure that children and other passen-  
gers cannot be trapped in any way when  
closing the windows.  
– Raise the front of the control.  
Controls, power windows. A. Front B. Rear.  
Remote control and lock buttons  
To operate the power windows with lock but-  
tons and remote control, see  
The driver can operate all of the power win-  
dows from the driver’s seat.  
page 94 and 102.  
The windows in the front doors can be  
opened and closed in two ways:  
WARNING  
Manual operation  
Make sure that children and other passen-  
gers cannot be trapped in any way when  
closing the windows. Pay close attention if  
the rear door windows are controlled from  
the driver’s door or if the windows are  
closed with the remote control.  
– Depress one of the controls (A) or (B)  
gently or raise it gently. The power window  
opens or closes as long as the switch is  
actuated.  
Automatic operation  
– Fully depress one of the controls (A) or  
raise it fully, then release. The side window  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
       
02 Instruments and controls  
Power windows  
Blocking power windows in the rear  
doors  
Rear power windows  
NOTE  
02  
If the car has electric child safety locks on  
the rear doors, the light indicates that these  
are activated. The doors then cannot be  
opened from the inside. A text message is  
shown on the display when the electric child  
safety locks are activated.  
Front passenger seat  
The rear door windows can be operated with  
the control on each door or with the switch  
on the driver’s door. If the light in the switch  
for blocking the rear power windows (located  
in the control panel in the driver’s door) is lit,  
the rear door windows can only be operated  
from the driver’s door. The windows in the  
rear doors are operated in the same way as  
the windows in the front doors.  
Blocking rear power windows and electric child  
1
safety locks .  
The light in the switch is lit  
The rear door windows can only be operated  
from the driver’s door.  
The light in the switch is extinguished  
The rear door windows can be operated both  
with the control on each rear door and with  
the controls on the driver’s door.  
Front passenger seat  
The control in the front passenger door oper-  
ates that window only.  
1Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
Calibrating the compass  
Interior rearview mirror  
Rearview mirror with compass (option  
on certain markets)  
02  
The illustration is a montage. The mirror has  
either manual dipping or automatic dimming.  
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.  
The compass is set for the geographical area  
to which the car was delivered. The compass  
should be calibrated if the car is moved  
across several magnetic zones.  
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview  
mirror has an integrated display that shows  
the compass direction in which the front of  
the car is pointing. Eight different directions  
are shown with English abbreviations: N  
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south  
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)  
and NW (north west).  
Bright light from behind could be reflected in  
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver.  
Dipping  
1. Control for dimming  
– Stop the car in a wide open area with the  
engine running at idling speed.  
2. Normal position  
3. Dimmed position.  
– Press and hold button (1) for at least  
6 seconds. Following which, the sign C is  
shown (the button is concealed, so use a  
paper clip for example to press it in).  
Automatic dimming (option)  
Bright light from behind is automatically  
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control  
(1) is not available in mirrors with automatic  
dimming.  
– Press and hold button (1) for at least  
3 seconds. The number for the current  
magnetic zone is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
           
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
– Press the button (1) repeatedly until the  
number for the required magnetic zone (1–  
15 ) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic  
zones for the compass.  
02  
– Wait until the display returns to showing  
the character C.  
– Following which, press and hold the but-  
ton for 9 seconds and select L for left-  
hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive.  
– Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum  
speed of 10 km/h until a compass direc-  
tion is shown on the display, which indi-  
cates that the calibration is complete.  
Magnetic zones, Asia.  
Magnetic zones, Australia.  
Magnetic zones, Europe.  
Magnetic zones, South America.  
Magnetic zones, Africa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
– Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-  
ically stop in the fully extended position.  
Retractable power door mirrors  
(option)  
The mirrors can be retracted for parking and  
driving in narrow spaces. This can be done in  
ignition position I and II.  
Door mirrors  
02  
Resetting to neutral  
Mirrors that have been moved out of position  
by an external force must be reset to the neu-  
tral position for electric retracting and ex-  
tending to work.  
Retracting the mirrors  
– Press the L and R button at the same  
time.  
– Use the L and R buttons to retract the  
mirrors.  
– Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-  
ically stop in the fully retracted position.  
– Extend the mirrors again with the L and R  
button. The mirrors are now reset to the  
neutral.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the  
mirrors as this could scratch the glass and  
the water and dirt-repellent coating could  
be damaged. Use the defroster function in-  
stead, see page 73.  
Home safe and approach lighting  
The light on the door mirrors (option) illumi-  
nates when the approach lighting or home  
safe lighting is activated.  
1
The controls for adjusting the two door mir-  
rors are at the front of the driver’s door arm-  
rest. The rearview mirrors can be operated in  
ignition position I and II.  
1
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS  
(option)  
BLIS is an information system that under cer-  
tain conditions can help to draw the driver’s  
attention to vehicles moving in the same di-  
rection in the so-called "blind spot", see  
page 128.  
Option  
– Press the L button for the left-hand door  
mirror or R for the right-hand door mirror.  
The light in the button lights.  
WARNING  
The driver-side door mirror is wide angled  
to provide optimal vision. Objects may ap-  
pear further away than they actually are.  
–
Adjust the position with the joystick in the  
centre.  
– Press the L or R button again. The lamp  
goes out.  
Folding out the mirrors  
– Press the L and R button at the same  
time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
Water and dirt-repellent coating  
(option)  
The door mirrors are treated with a coating  
that maintains good rear-view vision despite  
the rain.  
02  
The mirrors treated with the  
water and dirt-repellent  
coating are marked with a  
small symbol. For informa-  
tion on how the mirrors  
should be maintained,  
see page 169.  
In certain weather conditions, the function of  
the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the  
door mirror defrosters are used, see page 73.  
Heat the door mirrors:  
• If they are covered with ice or snow.  
• In heavy rain and dirty road conditions.  
• If they are misted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
02 Instruments and controls  
Power sunroof (option)  
Open positions  
From ventilation position to fully open sun-  
roof:  
02  
– Pull the control rearward to the end  
position (1) and release.  
Sliding position  
Automatic operation  
– Pull the control past the point of  
resistance (2) to the rear end position (1)  
or past the point of resistance (3) to the  
forward end position (4) and release. The  
sunroof opens/closes completely.  
Manual operation  
Open:  
– Pull the control rearward to the point of  
resistance (2). The sunroof moves toward  
the fully open position as long as the  
button is held in this position.  
1. Opening, automatic  
The sunroof controls are located in the roof  
panel. The sunroof can be opened to two po-  
sitions:  
2. Opening, manual  
3. Closing, manual  
Close:  
A. Ventilation position, up at the rear edge  
B. Sliding position, backwards/forwards  
The ignition key must be in position I or II.  
4. Closing, automatic  
– Press the control forward to the point of  
resistance (3). The sunroof moves toward  
the closed position as long as the button  
is held in this position.  
5. Opening, ventilation position  
6. Closing, ventilation position  
Ventilation position  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Open:  
If there are children in the car:  
– Press the rear edge of the control (5) up-  
ward.  
The sunroof’s pinch-protection function  
only operates during automatic closing, not  
manual closing.  
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof  
by removing the ignition key if the driver  
leaves the car.  
Close:  
– Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-  
ward.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Power sunroof (option)  
Closing with remote control or lock  
button  
Sunscreen  
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interi-  
or sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back au-  
tomatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip  
the handle and slide the screen forwards to  
close it.  
02  
Pinch protection  
The sunroof’s pinch protection function is  
activated if the hatch is blocked by an object.  
If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automat-  
ically open to the previous position.  
WARNING  
The sunroof’s pinch protection function  
only operates during automatic closing, not  
during manual closing.  
Make sure children’s hands are clear when  
closing the sunroof.  
– Press and hold the lock button for two  
seconds. The sunroof and windows close  
and the doors lock.  
If you need to interrupt closing:  
– Press the lock button again.  
WARNING  
Make sure that children or other passengers  
are not in danger of having hands trapped  
when closing the sunroof with the remote  
control. Always operate the sunroof with  
caution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
     
02 Instruments and controls  
Personal preferences  
Possible settings  
Climate control settings  
Personal preferences can be set for some of  
the car’s functions: the locks, climate control  
and audio functions. For audio functions, see  
page 204.  
02  
Automatic fan adjustment  
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in  
cars equipped with ECC:  
– Select from Low, Normal and High.  
Control panel  
A. Display  
Recirculation timer  
When the timer is active, the air recirculates  
for 3 – 12 minutes, depending on the outside  
air temperature.  
B. MENU  
C. EXIT  
D. ENTER  
E. Navigation  
– Select On/Off depending on whether or  
not you wish the recirculation timer to be  
active.  
Use  
Reset all  
The settings are shown on the display (A).  
Resets the climate function options to the  
factory settings.  
Open the menu to enter settings:  
– Press MENU (B).  
Car settings  
– Scroll, for example, to Car Settings with  
the navigation button (E).  
Unlock confirm. light  
The hazard warning flashers can provide  
feedback when the car is unlocked with the  
remote control. This function can be turned  
On or Off.  
– Press ENTER (D).  
– Select an alternative with the navigation  
button (E).  
– Press ENTER to activate the selection.  
Control panel  
Close the menu:  
Lock feedback light  
The hazard warning flashers can provide  
feedback when the car is locked with the  
– Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-  
ond.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
                     
02 Instruments and controls  
Personal preferences  
remote control. This function can be turned  
Approach lighting  
On or Off.  
Select the time the car’s lights should remain  
on when the approach lighting button is  
pressed. The following alternatives are avail-  
able: 30/60/90 seconds.  
02  
Automatic locking – doors  
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h  
the doors and tailgate can be locked auto-  
matically. This function can be turned On/  
Off. Pulling the door handle twice unlocks  
and opens the doors from the inside.  
Home safe lighting  
Select the time the car’s lights should remain  
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled  
back after the ignition key has been re-  
moved. The following alternatives are availa-  
ble: 30/60/90 seconds.  
Unlock doors  
There are two alternatives for unlocking:  
Information  
• VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). The  
car’s unique identity number.  
• All doors – one press of the remote con-  
trol unlocks both doors and the tailgate.  
• Driver’s door first, then all others – one  
press of the remote control unlocks the  
driver’s door. A second press then un-  
locks all the other doors and the tailgate.  
• Number of keys. The number of keys  
registered for the car is shown.  
Keyless entry (option in certain markets)  
• All doors – all doors are unlocked at the  
same time.  
• Doors on the same side – front and rear  
doors on the same side are unlocked  
simultaneously.  
• Both front doors – both front doors are  
unlocked simultaneously.  
• One front door – one of the front doors  
(either) can be unlocked separately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
                   
General information on climate  
control ...................................................................................................... 70  
Manual climate control, A/C..................................................................... 72  
Electronic climate control,  
ECC (option)............................................................................................. 74  
Air distribution.......................................................................................... 77  
Fuel-driven heater (option) ....................................................................... 78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
CLIMATE CONTROL  
03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03 Climate control  
General information on climate control  
ozone layer. The system must only be  
charged with R134a refrigerant. Have an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop carry out this work.  
Air conditioning  
Air vents in the dashboard  
The climate control system cools or heats,  
and dehumidifies the air entering the passen-  
ger compartment. The car is equipped with  
either manual (A/C) or electronic climate con-  
trol (ECC).  
Passenger compartment filter  
All air which enters the passenger compart-  
ment is first cleaned by a filter. This filter  
must be replaced regularly. Follow the Volvo  
Service Programme for the recommended  
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a  
severely contaminated environment, it may  
be necessary to replace the filter more often.  
03  
NOTE  
The air conditioning system can be  
switched off, but to ensure the best possi-  
ble air in the passenger compartment and  
prevent the windows from misting, it should  
always be on.  
NOTE  
There are several different types of passen-  
ger compartment filter. Ensure that the cor-  
rect filter is installed.  
Misting windows  
Reduce the problem of windows misting up  
on the inside by cleaning the windows. Use a  
regular window cleaner.  
A. Open  
B. Closed  
Display  
C. Lateral airflow  
D. Vertical airflow  
Ice and snow  
There is a display above the climate control  
panel that displays climate control settings.  
Remove ice and snow from the climate con-  
trol air intake (the grille between the bonnet  
and the windscreen).  
Personal preferences  
You can set preferences for two climate con-  
trol functions:  
Aim the outer vents towards the side win-  
dows to remove misting from the front side  
windows.  
Fault tracing and repair  
Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate  
control system to an authorised Volvo work-  
shop only.  
• Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to  
Cold weather: Close the centre vents for op-  
timum comfort and best demisting.  
cars with ECC).  
• Recirculation timer for passenger com-  
partment air.  
Refrigerant  
For information about these settings, see  
page 66.  
The air conditioning system contains R134a  
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-  
rine, which means that it is harmless to the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
             
03 Climate control  
General information on climate control  
Vents in parcel shelf  
NOTE  
ECC (option)  
Actual temperature  
The temperature you select corresponds to  
the physical experience with reference to  
factors such as air speed, humidity and solar  
radiation in and around the car.  
Do not cover the cargo area vents in the  
parcel shelf with clothing or other objects.  
03  
Condensation  
In warm weather, condensation from the air  
conditioning system may drip under the car.  
This is normal.  
Sensor location  
• The sun sensor is on the top side of the  
dashboard.  
• The temperature sensor for the passenger  
compartment is behind the climate control  
panel.  
NOTE  
Do not cover or block the sensors with  
clothing or other objects.  
Side windows and sunroof  
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-  
isfactorily, close all side windows and the  
sunroof (if fitted).  
Acceleration  
The air conditioning system switches off  
temporarily at full throttle. You may feel a  
temporary rise in temperature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
 
03 Climate control  
Manual climate control, A/C  
Control panel  
03  
1. Fan  
Functions  
1. Fan  
2. Recirculation  
Recirculation can be used  
to shut out bad air, exhaust  
fumes, etc. from the pas-  
senger compartment. The  
air in the passenger com-  
partment is recirculated. No  
outside air is taken into the  
2. Recirculation  
3. Defroster  
Increase or decrease the  
fan speed by turning the  
knob.  
4. Air distribution  
5. AC ON/OFF  
If the knob is turned anti-  
clockwise and the fan indi-  
cator in the display goes  
6. Heated front left seat  
7. Heated front right seat  
car when this function is activated. Recircu-  
lation (together with the air conditioning sys-  
tem ) cools the passenger compartment  
more quickly in hot weather. If the air in the  
car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of  
the windows misting.  
8. Rear window and door mirror defrost-  
ers  
out, the fan and the air conditioning are  
switched off. The display shows the fan sym-  
bol and OFF.  
9. Temperature  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
         
03 Climate control  
Manual climate control, A/C  
– Lower heat  
Press the button twice – one light illumi-  
nates.  
Timer  
4. Air distribution  
The airflow can be distribut-  
The timer function minimises the risk of icing,  
misting and bad air if recirculation is select-  
ed. See page 66, for how to activate/deacti-  
vate the function. When the Defroster (3) pro-  
gram is selected, recirculation is deactivated.  
ed to the windows, dash-  
board vents or floor by  
pressing the air distribution  
buttons.  
– Heat off  
Press the button three times – light not  
illuminated.  
03  
8. Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
A symbol on the display  
above the climate control panel and an illumi-  
nated light in the relevant button indicate  
which function has been selected.  
3. Defroster  
Quickly removes misting  
and ice from the wind-  
screen and side windows.  
Air flows to the windows at  
high fan speed. The light in  
the defroster button lights  
when the function is active.  
Heating is used to quickly  
remove misting and ice from  
the rear window and door  
mirrors.  
See the table on page 77.  
5. A/C – On/Off  
The rear window and door  
mirrors are defrosted simul-  
ON: Air conditioning is on. It  
is controlled by the system’s  
AUTO function. This way, in-  
coming air is cooled and de-  
humidified.  
taneously if the switch is pressed once. The  
function is active if one light is lit in the  
switch. The door mirror heating is deactivat-  
ed automatically after approximately  
6 minutes. The rear window heating is deac-  
tivated after approximately 12 minutes.  
The following also takes place when the de-  
froster function is activated in order to pro-  
vide maximum dehumidification in the pas-  
senger compartment:  
OFF: Off.  
• the air conditioning (A/C) is automatically  
switched on (can be switched off with the  
A/C button (5)  
When the defroster function is activated the  
air conditioning is automatically switched on  
(can be switched off with the A/C button).  
9. Temperature  
Select cooling or heating for  
both driver and passenger  
side.  
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.  
When the defroster is switched off the cli-  
mate control returns to the previous settings.  
6. and 7. Heated front seats  
(option on certain markets)  
– Higher heat  
Press the button once –  
both lights illuminate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
             
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC (option)  
Control panel  
03  
1. AUTO  
Functions  
1. AUTO  
2. Fan  
Increase or decrease fan  
speed by turning the knob.  
The fan speed is regulated  
automatically if AUTO is se-  
lected, and the previously  
set fan speed is disen-  
gaged.  
2. Fan  
The AUTO function auto-  
matically regulates climate  
control and maintains the  
selected temperature. The  
AUTO function controls  
heating, air conditioning, fan  
speed, recirculation, and air  
3. Recirculation/Air quality system  
4. Defroster  
5. Air distribution  
6. A/C ON/OFF  
7. Heated front left seat  
8. Heated front right seat  
NOTE  
distribution. If you select one or more manual  
functions, the other functions continue to be  
controlled automatically. All manual settings  
are switched off when AUTO is switched on.  
The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.  
9. Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the  
fan indication on the display goes out, the  
fan and the air conditioning are switched  
off. The display shows the fan symbol and  
OFF.  
10.Temperature selector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
       
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC (option)  
duce the levels of odours and pollution in the  
• The defroster function for the front, side  
and rear windows can also be used to  
demist the windows.  
3. Recirculation  
passenger compartment. When the sensor  
detects polluted outside air, the air intakes  
are closed and the air in the passenger com-  
partment is recirculated. A green light (A) illu-  
minates in the button when the air quality  
sensor is active.  
Recirculation can be used  
to shut out bad air, exhaust  
fumes, etc. from the pas-  
senger compartment. The  
air in the passenger com-  
partment is recirculated, i.e.  
no outside air is taken into  
4. Defroster  
Quickly removes misting  
and ice from the wind-  
screen and side windows.  
Air flows to the windows at  
high fan speed. The light in  
the defroster button lights  
when the function is active.  
03  
Activating the air quality sensor:  
the car when this function is activated. If the  
air in the car recirculates for too long, there is  
a risk of misting on the insides of the win-  
dows.  
– Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality  
sensor (normal setting).  
Or:  
The following also takes place when the de-  
froster function is activated in order to pro-  
vide maximum dehumidification in the pas-  
senger compartment:  
– Switch between three functions by press-  
ing repeatedly the recirculation button.  
Timer  
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,  
misting and bad air if recirculation is select-  
ed. See page 66, for how to activate/deacti-  
vate the function.  
• Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)  
illuminates.  
• the air conditioning (A/C) is automatically  
switched on (can be switched off with the  
A/C button (5)  
• No recirculation engaged, provided it is  
not required for cooling in hot weather –  
light not illuminated.  
NOTE  
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.  
• Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illu-  
minates.  
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation  
is always deactivated.  
When the defroster is switched off the cli-  
mate control returns to the previous settings.  
Keep the following in mind:  
5. Air distribution  
3. Air quality system (option)  
(same button as recircula-  
tion)  
• As a rule, the air quality sensor should  
always be engaged.  
The airflow can be distribut-  
ed to the windows, dash-  
board vents or floor by  
pressing the air distribution  
buttons.  
• Recirculation is limited in cold weather to  
avoid misting.  
The air quality system con-  
sists of a multi-filter and a  
sensor. The filter separates  
gases and particles to re-  
• If the insides of the windows start misting  
up, disengage the air quality sensor.  
A symbol on the display  
above the climate control panel and an  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
         
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC (option)  
illuminated light in the relevant button indi-  
cate which function has been selected.  
When the car is started, the most recent set-  
ting is resumed.  
9. Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
Heating is used to quickly  
See the table on page 77.  
NOTE  
remove misting and ice from  
the rear window and door  
mirrors.  
6. AC – ON/OFF  
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by  
selecting a higher or lower temperature than  
the actual desired temperature.  
ON: Air conditioning is on. It  
is controlled by the sys-  
tem’s AUTO function. This  
way, incoming air is cooled  
and dehumidified.  
03  
The rear window and door  
mirrors are defrosted simul-  
taneously if the switch is pressed once. The  
function is active if one light is lit in the  
switch. The door mirror heating is deactivat-  
ed automatically after approximately  
6 minutes. The rear window heating is deac-  
tivated after approximately 12 minutes.  
OFF: Off.  
When the defroster function is activated the  
air conditioning is automatically switched on  
(can be switched off with the A/C button).  
10. Temperature selector  
The temperatures on the  
driver and passenger sides  
can be set independently.  
7. and 8. Heated front seats  
(option on certain markets)  
To activate front seat heat-  
ing:  
Press the button once to  
activate one side. Press  
again to activate the other  
– Higher heat:  
Press the button once –  
both lights illuminate.  
side. Press the button a third time to activate  
both sides.  
– Lower heat:  
Press the button twice – one light illumi-  
nates.  
The active side is indicated by the button’s  
light and in the display above the climate  
control panel.  
– Heat off:  
Press the button three times – light not  
illuminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
     
03 Climate control  
Air distribution  
Air distribution  
Use:  
Air distribution  
Use:  
Air to windows. Some air  
flows to the dashboard air  
vents. The air is not recircu-  
lated. Air conditioning is  
always engaged.  
To remove ice and  
misting quickly.  
Air to the floor and  
To ensure comfortable  
conditions and good  
windows. Some air flows  
to the dashboard air vents. demisting in cold or  
humid weather.  
03  
Air to windscreen and side To prevent misting and  
windows. Some air flows to icing in a cold and  
Air to floor and from  
dashboard air vents.  
In sunny weather with  
cool outside tempera-  
tures.  
the dashboard air vents.  
humid climate. (Not for  
low fan speed.)  
Airflow to windows and  
from dashboard air vents.  
To ensure good  
comfort in warm, dry  
weather.  
Air to the floor. Some air  
flows to the dashboard air  
vents and windows.  
To war m the feet.  
Airflow to the head and  
chest from the dashboard  
air vents.  
To ensure efficient  
cooling in warm  
weather.  
Airflow to windows, from  
To provide cooler air for  
dashboard air vents and to the feet or warmer air to  
the floor.  
the upper body in cold  
weather or hot, dry  
weather.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
     
03 Climate control  
Fuel-driven heater (option)  
General information about heaters  
Activating the heater  
The parking heater can be started immedi-  
ately or set with two different start times us-  
ing TIMER AM and TIMER PM. Here, start  
time refers to the time the car is heated and  
ready. The car’s electronic system calculates  
when heating should be started based on the  
outside temperature. The heater is not run if  
the outside temperature exceeds 25 °C. At  
minus 10 °C and lower, the maximum run-  
ning time of the parking heater is 60 minutes.  
03  
Parking on a hill  
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of  
the car should point downhill to ensure that  
there is a supply of fuel to the parking  
heater.  
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.  
– Enter the time when the car is to be used.  
Press RESET (C) to enter the hours and  
minutes.  
– Press and hold the RESET (C) button until  
WARNING  
the timer is activated.  
The car must be outdoors when the petrol  
or diesel heater is used.  
Direct start  
– Use the thumbwheel (B) to scroll  
to DIRECT START.  
WARNING  
– Press RESET (C) to access the options  
ON and OFF.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before re-  
fuelling. Spilled fuel could be ignited.  
– Select ON. The heater will now run for  
60 minutes. Heating of the passenger  
compartment will begin as soon as the  
engine coolant has reached a temperature  
of 30 ºC.  
Check on the information display that the  
heater is off. When the additional heater is  
running, PARK HEAT ON is shown on the  
information display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
       
03 Climate control  
Fuel-driven heater (option)  
Immediate stop of heater  
Setting the TIMER AM and PM  
Clock/timer  
– Use the thumbwheel (B) to scroll  
For safety reasons, you can only programme  
times for the following 24 hours, not several  
days in advance.  
If the car clock is reset after the heater timers  
are programmed, the selected times will be  
cancelled.  
to DIRECT START.  
– Press RESET (C) to access the options  
ON and OFF.  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to TIMER.  
Additional heater (diesel)  
(certain countries)  
– Select OFF.  
– Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
hours setting.  
03  
Extra heat from the additional heater may be  
required in cold weather to reach the correct  
temperature in the passenger compartment.  
NOTE  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired  
hour.  
The car can be started and driven while the  
parking heater is still running.  
– Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
minutes setting.  
The additional heater starts automatically  
when extra heat is required if the engine is  
running. It is switched off automatically when  
the correct temperature is reached or when  
the engine is switched off.  
Battery and fuel  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired  
minute.  
If the battery has insufficient charge or the  
fuel level is too low, the parking heater will be  
switched off automatically. A message ap-  
pears on the information display. Acknowl-  
edge the message by pressing READ  
once (A).  
– Touch RESET to confirm the setting.  
– Press RESET to activate the timer. After  
setting TIMER AM, a second start time  
can be programmed with TIMER PM. Ac-  
cess this with the thumbwheel. Set the  
alternative start time in the same way as  
TIMER AM.  
IMPORTANT  
Repeated use of the parking heater com-  
bined with short journeys may discharge  
the battery and impair starting. If the heater  
is used regularly, the car must be driven for  
the same as the heater is run to ensure that  
the alternator has time to charge the bat-  
tery.  
Messages on the display  
When TIMER AM, TIMER PM and DIRECT  
START are activated, the information symbol  
on the combined instrument panel lights and  
an explanatory text appears on the informa-  
tion display. The display also indicates which  
TIMER is active when the driver removes the  
key from the ignition to leave the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
     
Front seats ............................................................................................... 82  
Interior lighting ......................................................................................... 84  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment...................................... 86  
Rear seat.................................................................................................. 88  
Cargo area................................................................................................ 90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
INTERIOR  
04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
04 Interior  
Front seats  
1
4. Lumbar support , turn the wheel, (op-  
– Move the seat as far back as possible.  
Seating position  
tion on passenger side)  
– Adjust the backrest to an upright position  
90 degrees.  
5. Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.  
6. Lever for power seat (option).  
– Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest  
while folding it forwards.  
WARNING  
– Push the seat forward so that the head  
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.  
Adjust the position of the driver’s seat be-  
fore setting off, never while driving.  
Floor mats (option)  
Check that the seat is locked in position.  
Volvo supplies floor mats which are especial-  
ly produced for your car.  
04  
Lowering the front seat backrest  
(option)  
WARNING  
The floor mat at the driver’s seat must be  
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment  
clips to prevent it from being trapped  
around and under the pedals.  
The driver’s and passenger seats can be ad-  
justed to the optimum sitting and driving  
positions  
1. Forward/backward: lift the handle to ad-  
just the distance to the steering wheel  
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked  
after changing position.  
2. Raise/lower the front of the seat cush-  
ion, pump up/down, (option on passen-  
ger side)  
3. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down,  
(option on passenger side)  
The passenger seat backrest can be folded  
forward to make room for long loads.  
1
Also applies to power seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
       
04 Interior  
Front seats  
Memory function  
Emergency stop  
Power seat (option)  
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press  
any of the buttons to stop the function.  
WARNING  
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do  
not play with the controls.  
Check that there are no objects in front of,  
behind or under the seat during adjustment.  
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen-  
gers can be trapped.  
04  
Key memory in remote control key  
The driver’s seat settings are stored in the  
key memory when the car has been locked  
with the remote control key. When the car is  
unlocked with the same remote control key  
the driver’s seat adopts the stored settings  
when the driver’s door is opened.  
Buttons for memory function  
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time  
after unlocking the door with the remote con-  
trol without the key being inserted into the ig-  
nition switch. The seat can always be set in  
ignition position I or II.  
Store setting  
– Adjust seat.  
– Press and hold button M while pressing  
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.  
NOTE  
1. Front edge of seat cushion up/down  
2. Seat, forwards/backwards  
3. Seat, up/down  
The key memory is independent of the seat  
memory.  
Using a stored setting  
Press one of the memory buttons 1 – 3 until  
the seat stops. If you release the button then  
the movement of the seat will stop.  
4. Backrest rake  
Overload protection is deployed if any seat is  
blocked. If this occurs, switch off the ignition  
and wait a short time before operating the  
seat again. Only one of the seat’s settings  
can be adjusted at a time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
   
04 Interior  
Interior lighting  
Reading lamps and interior lighting  
Automatic lighting  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched on and off automatically when  
button (2) is in neutral position.  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds  
if:  
• the car is unlocked from the outside with  
the key or remote control  
04  
• the engine is stopped and the ignition key  
is turned to position 0  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched off when:  
• the engine is started.  
Passenger compartment lighting and reading  
lamps.  
Reading lamps, rear  
• the car is locked from the outside with the  
key or remote control  
4. Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off  
5. Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off  
1. Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off  
2. Passenger compartment lighting front  
and rear  
3. Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off  
Switch (2) has three positions for the interior  
lighting:  
• Off (0) – right-hand side depressed, auto-  
matic lighting off.  
• Neutral position – interior lighting comes  
on when a door is opened and goes out  
when the door is closed. The dimmer  
function is active.  
The passenger compartment lighting comes  
on and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the  
doors is open.  
The reading lamps can be switched on in ig-  
nition position I and II as well as when the en-  
gine is running. They can also be activated  
within 30 minutes after the engine has been  
switched off or when one of the doors has  
been opened/closed.  
The interior lighting can be switched on or  
off with switch (2) within 30 minutes, from  
when the key is turned to position 0, and  
the lighting remains on for 5 minutes if it is  
not switched off.  
• On â€“ left-hand side depressed, passenger  
compartment lighting on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
       
04 Interior  
Interior lighting  
1
Vanity mirror  
04  
The light comes on automatically when the  
cover is lifted.  
1
Option on certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
     
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
Storage spaces  
Glovebox  
1. Storage pocket (also on the front edge of  
the front seat cushions).  
2. Compartment in door panel.  
3. Ticket clip.  
4. Coat hanger, only for light garments.  
5. Glovebox.  
6. Waste bin (accessory).  
7. Storage compartment (e.g. for CD  
1
04  
discs) and cup holder .  
8. Bottle holder (option).  
9. Storage compartment and cup holder.  
IMPORTANT  
1. Unlocking  
2. Locking  
The waste bin (6) must not be mounted if a  
phone handset is mounted on the right-  
hand side of the centre console.  
The Owner’s Manual and maps can be kept  
here. There are also holders for coins, pens  
and fuel cards. The glovebox can be locked  
with the detachable key blade in the remote  
control. For further information on the key  
blade, see page 96.  
WARNING  
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects  
lie or protrude in such a way that they could  
cause injury during heavy braking.  
Always secure large and heavy objects with  
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.  
1
Storage compartment, in certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
 
04 Interior  
Rear seat  
Head restraint, rear  
Tipping the rear seat backrest  
The rear seat backrests can be tipped for-  
wards together, or individually, to make it  
easier to transport long objects. To avoid  
damaging the seatbelts when folding the  
backrests up or down, these should be  
hooked onto the grab handles.  
NOTE  
When tipping the rear seat the safety plug  
for the 12 V socket should be removed and  
placed in the glovebox to avoid pressure  
marks in the upholstery.  
04  
– Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before  
lowering or raising the backrests.  
All head restraints can be adjusted vertically  
to suit the height of the passenger. The upper  
edge of the head restraint should be aligned  
with middle of the back of the head. Raise  
the head restraint as necessary. To lower the  
head restraint, press the button by the right-  
hand pillar at the same time as pushing down  
the head restraint. To remove the head re-  
straint, press the button by the right-hand pil-  
lar while lifting out the head restraint.  
– Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to  
fold the seat cushions forward.  
IMPORTANT  
The head restraints can be damaged if they  
are not removed for loading. The head re-  
straint in the centre must also be removed  
for heavy loads.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
         
04 Interior  
Rear seat  
Bottle holder (option)  
NOTE  
When the backrest has been raised, the red  
indicator should no longer be showing. If it  
is, the backrest is not locked in place.  
WARNING  
Remember to take down the seatbelts once  
you have raised the backrest.  
04  
Lowering the backrest  
A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on  
the rear of the tunnel console.  
– Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to  
release the backrest. A red indicator on  
the lock catch shows that the backrest is  
no longer locked in place.  
– Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and  
remove the head restraints on the outside  
seats. The centre seat’s head restraint  
must be removed for a fully level floor.  
– Place the head restraints in the plastic  
sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised  
seat cushions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
04 Interior  
Cargo area  
Load retaining eyelets  
Electrical socket in cargo area  
(option)  
Bag holder (option)  
04  
The bag holder holds shopping bags in place  
and prevents them tipping over and spilling  
their contents.  
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten  
straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo  
area.  
Fold down the cover to access the electrical  
socket. This socket works regardless of  
whether the ignition is on. If the ignition is  
switched off and an appliance requiring a  
current greater than 0.1 A is plugged into the  
electrical socket, a warning message ap-  
pears on the information display. Avoid using  
the electrical socket with the ignition  
switched off due to the risk of running the  
battery flat.  
– Open the hatch in the cargo area.  
– Secure the shopping bags with the strap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
         
04 Interior  
04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
   
Remote control with key blade ................................................................ 94  
Keyless drive (option)............................................................................... 98  
Locking and unlocking........................................................................... 101  
Child safety locks................................................................................... 104  
Alarm (option)......................................................................................... 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
LOCKS AND ALARM  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
Remote control  
Loss of a remote control  
Remote control functions  
If you lose a remote control, take the car and  
the other remote controls to an authorised  
Volvo workshop. The code of the missing re-  
mote control must be erased from the sys-  
tem as a theft prevention measure.  
The car is supplied with two remote controls  
which also serve as ignition keys. The remote  
controls contain detachable metal key blades  
for mechanical locking/unlocking of the driv-  
er’s door and glovebox.  
Immobiliser  
The key blades’ unique code is available at  
authorised Volvo workshops, who can order  
new key blades.  
The remote controls are fitted with coded  
chips. The code must be accepted by the  
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The  
car can only be started if the correct remote  
control with the correct code is used.  
A maximum of six remote controls/key  
blades can be programmed and used for one  
single car.  
Turn signal indication during locking/  
unlocking  
05  
1. Locking â€” Locks the doors and the boot  
lid. Press and hold to close the windows  
and sunroof.  
When the car is locked or unlocked using the  
Keyless drive system or the remote control,  
two flashes of the direction indicators serve  
to indicate that locking/unlocking was cor-  
rectly performed. When locking, indication is  
only given if all locks are activated once the  
doors have been closed.  
2. Unlocking â€” Unlocks all side doors  
and the boot lid.  
3. Approach lighting — When you ap-  
proach the car:  
Press the yellow button on the remote  
control to switch on the interior lighting,  
position/parking lamps, number plate  
lighting and door mirror lamps (option).  
The lighting is switched off automati-  
cally after 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For  
information on setting the delay time,  
see page 67.  
Personal preferences can be used to deacti-  
vate indication via the direction indicators.  
There will then be no visual indication as to  
whether the lock status is correct. See  
page 66.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
             
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
4. Boot lid – Press the button once to  
unlock the boot lid only.  
Use the remote control’s detachable key  
blade to block access to the glovebox and  
cargo area . This means that the remote con-  
trol can only open the doors and that the car  
can be driven.  
1
NOTE  
The function does not open the boot lid.  
NOTE  
5. Panic function — Used to attract atten-  
tion in an emergency. Press and hold  
the red button for at least three sec-  
onds or press it twice within three  
seconds to activate the direction indi-  
cators and the horn. The function can  
be turned off with the same button  
once it has been active for at least  
5 seconds. Otherwise the function  
switches off automatically after  
30 seconds.  
The driver’s door can also be unlocked us-  
ing the remote control’s detachable key  
blade (without activating central locking),  
but this triggers the alarm which must be  
deactivated using the remote control. See  
page 106.  
05  
Removing the key blade  
To take the key blade out of the remote con-  
trol:  
IMPORTANT  
The narrow section of the remote control is  
particularly sensitive - this contains the  
chip. The car cannot be started if the chip is  
damaged.  
– Slide the spring-loaded catch (1) to the  
side while pulling the key blade (2) out.  
Inserting the key blade  
Be careful when inserting the key blade into  
the remote control.  
Key blade  
This feature is intended for when leaving the  
car, such as for servicing or valet parking at a  
hotel. Hand over the remote control and keep  
the removable key blade.  
– Hold the remote control with the narrow  
end pointing downwards and lower the  
key blade into its slot.  
– Lightly press the key blade to lock it in  
position. You should hear a "click".  
1
Only certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
 
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
Key blade  
05  
1. Active locks for remote control, without  
service locking activated.  
2. Active locks for remote control, with  
service locking activated.  
1
Service locking  
Service locking: turn the key blade  
180 degrees clockwise. This also means that  
the boot lid is blocked against opening with  
the remote control (a message is shown in  
the information display).  
For information on normal locking of the  
glovebox, see page 102.  
1
Certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
     
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
– Refit the cover and screw it shut.  
– Press the key blade back into place.  
Weak remote control battery  
Replacing the remote control battery  
When the battery runs down and full func-  
tionality cannot be guaranteed, the informa-  
tion symbol and REMOTE BATTERY LOW  
VOLTAGE appear on the display.  
Dispose of the old battery in an environmen-  
tally-friendly way.  
05  
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to sig-  
nals from the remote control at a normal dis-  
tance, the battery should be replaced (type  
CR 2032, 3 V).  
– Pull out the key blade.  
– Place the remote control with the keypad  
downward and remove the screw (1) using  
a small screwdriver.  
– Remove the cover.  
– Carefully note the position of the battery’s  
(+) and (–) poles on the inside of the  
cover.  
– Prise out (2) and change the battery. Avoid  
touching the battery and its terminals with  
your fingers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
 
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
Keyless lock and ignition system  
05  
The keyless drive system allows the car to be  
unlocked, driven and locked without the  
need for a key. You simply need to have the  
remote control with you in a pocket or a bag.  
ing message appears on the information dis-  
play and a reminder signal sounds. The  
warning message disappears when the re-  
mote control is brought back to the car or  
when the ignition dial is turned to position 0.  
The warning is only issued if the ignition dial  
is in position I or II after someone has  
opened and closed a door.  
Remote control max. 1.5 m from the car  
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a re-  
mote control must be no more than approx.  
1.5 m from the car door handle or boot lid.  
The system makes it easier and more con-  
venient to open the car, for example with  
shopping bags in one hand and a child in the  
other. It saves you having to take out or look  
for the remote control.  
This means that the person who wishes to  
open a door must have the remote control  
with him or her. It is not possible to open a  
door if the remote control is on the other side  
of the car.  
The warning message and reminder signal  
disappear when the remote control is  
brought back to the car after one of the fol-  
lowing actions:  
The two remote controls incorporate the key-  
less drive feature. You can order additional  
remote controls. The keyless drive system  
can handle up to six remote controls.  
The grey areas in the illustration indicate the  
range covered by the system’s antennas.  
If someone leaves the car and takes a key-  
less drive remote control with them, a warn-  
• a door has been opened and closed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
     
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
• the ignition dial has been turned to  
Unlocking  
When the remote control is within the range  
covered by the system’s antennas:  
position 0  
• the READ button has been pressed.  
– Open the doors by pulling the relevant  
handle.  
Never leave any remote control in the  
car  
If a remote control with keyless drive function  
is left in the car, it is made passive when the  
car is locked. This prevents unauthorised en-  
try.  
– Open the boot lid by pressing under the  
boot lid opening button and lift the boot  
lid.  
If for some reason the keyless drive function  
in the remote control is not operating, the car  
can be unlocked using the remote control  
functions, see page 94.  
If someone breaks into the car and finds the  
remote control, it can be activated and used  
again. It is therefore important to handle all  
remote controls with care.  
05  
Interference to remote control function  
Electromagnetic screening and fields can in-  
terfere with the keyless drive system. To  
avoid this: do not place the remote control  
near mobile phones, metallic objects or, for  
example, in a metal briefcase.  
Unlocking using the key blade  
The driver’s door can be opened as follows  
(central locking system not activated):  
– Carefully prise out the plastic cover in the  
handle by inserting the key blade in the  
hole on the bottom of the cover.  
If interference is experienced nonetheless,  
use the remote control and key blade in the  
normal way. See page 94.  
– Unlock the door using the key blade.  
Power seat (option) – remote control  
with memory function  
If several people with keyless drive remote  
controls get into the car, then the driver’s  
seat will be adjusted for the person who  
opens the door first.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
Locking  
Lock the doors and boot lid as follows:  
– Push in the lock button on one of the door  
handles.  
All doors and the boot lid must be closed be-  
fore the lock button is pushed in. Otherwise  
they will not lock.  
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on  
the inside of the doors retract.  
Personal preferences  
The Keyless Drive system can have personal  
preferences applied, see page 67.  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
Locking/unlocking the car from  
outside  
Boot lid  
WARNING  
Be aware that you can be locked in the car if  
it is locked from the outside with the remote  
control. You cannot leave the car using any  
of the controls inside the car.  
Unlocking  
Unlocking boot lid only:  
Unlocking  
The remote control unlock button can unlock  
the car in two different ways (select option in  
personal preferences, see page 67):  
– Press the boot lid unlock button on the  
remote control.  
Automatic relocking  
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened  
within two minutes of unlocking, all are  
locked again automatically (does not apply to  
locking from inside). This function prevents  
the car from being left unlocked unintention-  
ally. For cars with alarms, see page 106.  
Locking  
• with one press unlock both doors and the  
boot lid  
If the doors are locked when the boot lid is  
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with  
the remote control or from inside to lock the  
both doors and the boot lid.  
• with one press unlock the driver’s door  
and with a second press unlock the other  
door and the boot lid.  
Locking  
The remote control locks both side doors  
and the boot lid simultaneously. The door  
lock buttons and inside handles are disen-  
gaged.  
Automatic locking  
05  
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h  
the doors and boot lid can be locked auto-  
matically.  
The fuel filler flap cannot be opened if the car  
is locked with the remote control.  
When the function is activated and the doors  
have been locked they can be opened in two  
ways:  
NOTE  
• pull one of the door handles twice  
1
The car can be locked even if a door or the  
• press the unlock button by the door han-  
dle.  
boot lid is open. When the door is closed  
there is a risk that the keys will be locked in.  
The function can be activated/deactivated by  
means of personal preferences, see page 67.  
1
Applies to certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
           
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
All the doors can be locked using the respec-  
tive lock button.  
Locking/unlocking the car from inside  
Locking the glovebox  
Opening the doors  
When the doors are locked from the inside:  
– Pull the handle twice to unlock and open  
the doors.  
05  
The doors and the boot lid can be locked or  
unlocked simultaneously using the lock but-  
ton by the door handle.  
The glovebox can only be locked and un-  
locked with the removable key blade in the  
remote control.  
• Unlock the glovebox (1) by turning the key  
a quarter of a turn (90 degrees) anticlock-  
wise. The keyhole is vertical in the un-  
locked position.  
Unlocking  
– Press the upper section of the lock button.  
Press and hold to also open the side  
windows.  
• Lock the glovebox (2) by turning the key a  
quarter of a turn (90 degrees) clockwise.  
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked  
position.  
The door cannot be unlocked by pulling up  
the lock button.  
Locking  
– Press the lower part of the lock button.  
Press and hold to also close the windows  
and sunroof.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
       
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
If the car is equipped with an alarm, move-  
ment and tilt detectors are also deactivated.  
See page 106.  
Deadlocks  
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be  
opened from the inside if they are locked.  
The deadlocks are activated with the remote  
control. The deadlocks are set after a  
The light in the button illuminates until the car  
is locked with the key or the remote control.  
A message remains on the display as long as  
the key is in the ignition switch. The detec-  
tors are reactivated and deadlocks re-en-  
gaged the next time the ignition is switched  
on.  
25 second delay after the doors are locked.  
The car can only be unlocked from a dead-  
lock state with the remote control. The doors  
can also be opened from the outside with the  
key.  
WARNING  
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car  
without first deactivating the deadlocks.  
05  
1. Deactivation of the detectors and dead-  
locks  
2. No function  
Temporary deactivation of the  
deadlocks and any alarm detectors  
If someone is going to stay in the car but you  
still want to lock the doors from the outside,  
the deadlocks can be disabled.  
– Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn  
it to position II and then back to position  
I or 0.  
– Press button (1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
   
05 Locks and alarm  
Child safety locks  
Manual child locks in the rear doors  
Electric child safety locks and  
disabling the rear window buttons  
(option)  
Press the switch on the driver’s door. A mes-  
sage appears on the information display.  
To activate the child safety locks:  
– Turn the ignition key to position I or II.  
– Press the button. When the light in the  
button illuminates, the rear power win-  
dows and rear doors are locked.  
A message appears on the information dis-  
play when the child safety locks are  
activated.  
05  
Switch for electric child safety locks and disen-  
gaging rear power window buttons.  
Manual child lock in rear left door.  
NOTE  
To lock manually: The child safety locks are  
found on the trailing edge of the rear doors  
and are only accessible when the doors are  
open. Use the key blade to turn the lock and  
thus activate or deactivate the child safety  
lock.  
Cars with electric child safety locks do not  
also have manual child locks.  
WARNING  
Always keep the lock buttons pulled up  
when driving. In the event of an accident,  
this allows the emergency services to get  
into the car quickly. Passengers in the rear  
seat cannot open the doors from inside if  
the child safety locks are activated.  
Child safety locks activated  
An illuminated light, together with a text mes-  
sage on the display, indicates that the locks  
are activated. The doors cannot be opened  
from inside. The power windows can only be  
operated with the controls on the driver’s  
door.  
A. The doors cannot be opened from inside.  
B. The doors can be opened from inside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
     
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a mes-  
sage appears on the information display.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Alarm system  
Alarm light on instrument panel  
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-  
tors all alarm inputs.  
The alarm is triggered if:  
NOTE  
• a door, the bonnet or boot lid is opened  
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm  
system components. All such attempts may  
affect the terms of insurance.  
• a non-approved key is used in the ignition  
or if an attempt is made to force the lock  
• a movement is detected in the passenger  
compartment (if fitted with a movement  
detector)  
Arming the alarm  
– Press the lock button on the remote con-  
trol. A long flash from the car’s direction  
indicators confirms that the alarm is  
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted  
with a tilt detector)  
armed and that all the doors are locked.  
• a battery cable is disconnected  
05  
• anyone tries to disconnect the siren.  
A light on the instrument panel indicates the  
alarm system’s status:  
IMPORTANT  
The alarm is fully armed when the car’s di-  
rection indicators have made one long flash  
and the light on the dashboard flashes once  
per second.  
• Light not lit – the alarm is not armed.  
• The light flashes rapidly after disarming  
the alarm and until the ignition is switched  
on – the alarm has been triggered.  
Disarming the alarm  
• The light flashes once per second after the  
car’s direction indicators have given one  
long flash – the alarm is armed.  
– Press the unlock button on the remote  
control. Two short flashes from the car’s  
direction indicators confirm that the alarm  
is disarmed and that both doors are un-  
locked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
           
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
– Open the driver’s door with the key blade.  
The alarm is triggered and the siren  
sounds.  
– Turn the ignition key to position II and then  
Automatic alarm activation  
This function prevents you accidentally leav-  
ing the car without the alarm on.  
back to position 0. Remove the key.  
– Press button (1). The light in the button is  
illuminated until the car is locked.  
– Insert the remote control into the ignition  
switch. The alarm is deactivated. The  
alarm light flashes rapidly until the ignition  
key is turned to position II.  
If none of the doors or the boot lid are  
opened within two minutes of disarming the  
alarm (and the car has been unlocked with  
the remote control), the alarm is automatical-  
ly rearmed, and the car is locked at the same  
time.  
A message remains on the display as long as  
the key remains in the ignition switch (and for  
one minute after the key is removed).  
Temporary deactivation of the  
deadlocks and detectors  
The detectors are reactivated the next time  
the ignition is switched on.  
If the car has deadlocks, these are also re-  
engaged.  
Deactivating a triggered alarm  
– Press the unlock button on the remote  
control or insert the key in the ignition  
switch.  
05  
Confirmation is given by two short flashes  
from the direction indicators.  
Alarm signals  
When the alarm is triggered, the following  
happens:  
• A siren sounds for no more than  
25 seconds. The siren has its own battery  
which is used if the car battery has insuffi-  
cient charge or is disconnected.  
1. Deactivation of the detectors  
2. No function  
• The direction indicators flash for five min-  
utes or until the alarm is deactivated.  
To prevent the alarm being tripped errone-  
ously, such as during a ferry journey, the  
movement and tilt detectors can be tempo-  
rarily disengaged.  
Remote control not working  
If for some reason the remote control is not  
working, the alarm can still be switched off  
and the car started as follows:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
             
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
– Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock  
the doors with the button on the remote  
control.  
Testing the alarm system  
Testing the movement detector in the  
passenger compartment  
– Open all the windows.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Open the bonnet with the handle under  
the dashboard. A siren should sound and  
all direction indicators flash.  
– Arm the alarm. Arming the alarm is con-  
firmed by the light flashing slowly.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Test the movement detector in the pas-  
senger compartment, such as by lifting  
out a bag from a seat. A siren should  
sound and all direction indicators should  
flash.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
05  
Testing the doors  
– Arm the alarm.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Unlock the driver’s door with the key  
blade.  
– Open one of the doors. A siren should  
sound and all direction indicators flash.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
Testing the bonnet  
– Sit in the car and deactivate the move-  
ment detector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
 
General................................................................................................... 110  
Refuelling ............................................................................................... 112  
Starting the engine................................................................................. 113  
Ignition switch and steering lock............................................................ 114  
Keyless drive.......................................................................................... 115  
Manual gearbox ..................................................................................... 116  
Automatic gearbox................................................................................. 118  
All-wheel drive........................................................................................ 121  
Brake system ......................................................................................... 122  
Stability and traction control  
system.................................................................................................... 124  
Parking assistance (option) .................................................................... 126  
Blind Spot Information System BLIS (option) ........................................ 128  
Towing and recovery .............................................................................. 131  
Start assistance ..................................................................................... 133  
Driving with a trailer ............................................................................... 134  
Towing equipment.................................................................................. 136  
Detachable towbar................................................................................. 138  
Loading .................................................................................................. 143  
Adjusting headlamp pattern................................................................... 144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
STARTING AND DRIVING  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06 Starting and driving  
General  
Avoid overheating the cooling system  
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a  
trailer up long, steep ascents.  
Economical driving  
Driving in water  
The car can be driven through water at a  
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum  
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be  
exercised when passing through flowing  
water.  
Driving economically means driving smoothly  
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv-  
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi-  
tions.  
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you  
stop after a hard drive.  
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front  
of the grille if driving in extreme high  
temperatures.  
• Get the engine warmed up as soon as  
possible.  
• Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light  
loads as soon as it is possible.  
Avoid overheating the engine  
IMPORTANT  
Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm  
(diesel engine: 3500 rpm) if driving with a  
trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-  
perature could then become too high.  
• A cold engine consumes more fuel than a  
warm one.  
Engine damage can occur if water enters  
the air filter.  
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-  
mission. This reduces the lubricating ability  
of the oils and shortens the service life of  
these systems.  
• Avoid braking too hard.  
• Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the  
car.  
Open tailgate  
• Do not use winter tyres when the roads  
are dry.  
Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is  
necessary to drive with the tailgate open for a  
short distance:  
When driving in water, maintain a low speed  
and do not stop the car. When the water has  
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly  
and check that full brake function is attained.  
Water and mud for example can make the  
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake  
function.  
• Remove load carriers when they are not  
being used.  
06  
– Close all windows.  
• Avoid driving with open windows.  
– Set the air distribution to the windscreen  
and floor and run the fan at high speed.  
Slippery driving conditions  
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under  
controlled conditions to learn how the car re-  
acts.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic  
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car  
through the cargo area.  
Engine and cooling system  
Under special conditions, for example when  
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with  
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine  
and cooling system will overheat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
             
06 Starting and driving  
General  
Clean the electric contacts of the electric en-  
gine block heater and trailer coupling after  
driving in water and mud.  
Do not overload the battery  
The electrical functions in the car load the  
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the  
ignition position II when the engine is  
switched off. Use ignition position I instead,  
as less power is consumed.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not let the car stand with water over the  
sills for any long period of time. This could  
cause electrical malfunctions.  
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to  
restart. Tow the car out of the water.  
Examples of functions that use a lot of pow-  
er:  
• ventilation fan  
• windscreen wipers  
• audio equipment (high volume)  
• parking lights  
Also, be aware of different accessories that  
load the electrical system. Do not use func-  
tions which use a lot of power when the en-  
gine is switched off.  
If the battery voltage is low, a message ap-  
pears on the display. The energy-saving  
function shuts down certain functions or re-  
duces the load on the battery by, for exam-  
ple, slowing the ventilation fan and switching  
off the audio equipment. Charge the battery  
by starting the engine.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Refuelling  
– Take out the cap.  
Opening the fuel filler flap  
Petrol  
IMPORTANT  
3. Hang up the cap on the inside of the  
fuel filler flap.  
Do not add cleaning additives to the petrol,  
unless recommended by Volvo.  
NOTE  
Put the petrol cap back after refuelling. Turn  
until one or more clear clicks are heard.  
Diesel  
At low temperatures (–5 °C to –40 °C), a par-  
affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,  
which can lead to ignition problems.  
Filling up with fuel  
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump  
nozzle cuts out.  
IMPORTANT  
NOTE  
Use special winter grade fuel during cold  
months.  
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot  
weather.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuel-  
ling.  
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified on  
page 240 should not be used as engine pow-  
er and fuel consumption can be negatively  
affected.  
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the  
lighting panel, see page 49. The engine must  
be switched off before the flap can be  
opened. The fuel flap is located on the rear  
right wing.  
06  
WARNING  
Closing  
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ig-  
nited by the exhaust fumes.  
Push in the flap until you hear a click.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before  
starting to refuel.  
Fuel cap  
– Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resist-  
Never carry an activated mobile phone  
when refuelling the ring signal could cause  
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,  
leading to fire and injury.  
ance is felt.  
– Turn past the resistance until it comes to a  
stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
         
06 Starting and driving  
Starting the engine  
1
Before starting the engine  
Starting the engine  
Diesel particle filter (DPF)  
– Apply the parking brake.  
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle  
filter, which results in more efficient emission  
control. The particles in the exhaust gases  
are collected in the filter during normal driv-  
ing. So-called "regeneration" is started in or-  
der to burn away the particles and empty the  
filter. This requires the engine to have  
Petrol  
Automatic gearbox  
– Gear selector in position P or N.  
– Turn the ignition key to position III.  
If the engine does not start within 5–  
10 seconds, release the key and try again.  
Manual gearbox  
Diesel  
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the  
clutch pedal fully depressed. This is particu-  
larly important in very cold conditions.  
– Turn the ignition key to position II.  
An indicator symbol in the combined in-  
strument panel shows that engine pre-  
heating is underway, see page 43.  
reached normal operating temperature.  
Regeneration of the filter takes place auto-  
matically at an interval of 300 – 900 km de-  
pending on driving conditions. Regeneration  
normally takes between 10 and 20 minutes.  
During this time fuel consumption may in-  
crease slightly.  
WARNING  
– Turn the ignition key to position III when  
the indicator symbol goes out.  
Never remove the ignition key from the  
steering lock while driving or when the car is  
being towed. The steering lock could other-  
wise be activated, making it impossible to  
steer the car.  
The ignition key must be in position II when  
the car is being towed.  
Autostart (5-cylinder)  
With the autostart function, there is no need  
to hold the ignition key (or ignition dial on  
cars with Keyless Drive, see page 115) in  
position III until the engine has started.  
The rear window heating may be activated  
automatically to increase the load on the en-  
gine during regeneration without warning.  
06  
Regeneration in cold weather  
If the car is frequently driven short distances  
in cold weather then the engine does not  
reach normal operating temperature. This  
means that regeneration of the diesel particle  
filter does not take place and the filter is not  
emptied.  
NOTE  
Turn the ignition key to the start position and  
then release. The starter motor then works  
automatically until the engine has started.  
The idling speed can be noticeably higher  
than normal for certain engine types during  
cold starting. This is so that the emissions  
system can reach normal operating temper-  
ature as quickly as possible, which minimis-  
es exhaust emissions and protects the  
environment.  
NOTE  
If the diesel engine is started in extreme  
cold without waiting for engine preheating,  
then the automatic start sequence can be  
delayed for a couple of seconds.  
When the filter has become approximately  
80% full of particles, the yellow information  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
               
06 Starting and driving  
Ignition switch and steering lock  
symbol on the dashboard illuminates, and  
the message SOOT FILTER FULL SEE  
MANUAL is shown on the dashboard dis-  
play.  
When the steering lock is activated  
If the front wheels are positioned so that  
there is tension in the steering lock, a warn-  
ing message may be shown in the informa-  
tion display and the car prohibited from  
starting.  
Ignition switch and steering lock  
0 – Locked position  
The steering lock is activat-  
ed when the key is removed  
from the lock.  
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the  
car until the engine reaches normal operating  
temperature, preferably on a main road or  
motorway. The car should then be driven for  
approximately 20 minutes more.  
– Remove the key and turn the steering  
wheel to release the tension.  
I – Radio position  
– Hold the steering wheel in this position.  
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt  
to start the car.  
Certain electrical compo-  
nents can be switched on.  
The engine’s electrical sys-  
tem is not activated.  
When regeneration is complete the message  
is cleared automatically.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT  
Never remove the ignition key from the igni-  
tion switch while driving or when the car is  
being towed. The steering lock could other-  
wise be activated, making it impossible to  
steer the car.  
II – Driving position  
The key position when driv-  
ing. The car’s electrical sys-  
tem is energised.  
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of  
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start  
the engine and there is a risk that the filter  
will have to be replaced.  
06  
Use the parking heater (option) in cold  
weather so that the engine reaches normal  
operating temperature more quickly.  
WARNING  
III – Start position  
The starter motor is en-  
gaged. Release the key,  
which springs back auto-  
matically to the driving po-  
sition, once the engine has  
started.  
Always remove the ignition key from the ig-  
nition when leaving the car, especially if  
there are children in the car.  
Ignition keys and electronic  
immobiliser  
The ignition key must not hang with other  
keys or metal objects on the same key ring.  
The electronic immobiliser could be activated  
accidentally.  
Make sure the steering lock is activated  
when the car is left to reduce the risk of theft.  
A ticking sound may be heard if the key is be-  
tween positions. Turn the key to position II  
and back to eliminate the sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
       
06 Starting and driving  
Keyless drive  
General  
Starting the car  
Starting with the remote control  
– Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manu-  
al gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-  
matic gearbox).  
Petrol engine  
– Press in and turn the ignition dial to  
position III.  
Diesel engine  
– First turn the ignition dial to position II and  
wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the  
combined instrument panel goes out, see  
page 43.  
– Following which, turn the ignition dial to  
position III.  
If the remote control battery is discharged  
then the Keyless Drive function does not  
work. In which case, start the car by using  
the remote control as ignition dial.  
The keyless drive function allows the car to  
be unlocked, driven and locked without the  
need for a key, see page 98.  
06  
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the  
same way as the key. One precondition for  
starting the car is that the car’s remote con-  
trol is located inside the passenger compart-  
ment or the cargo area.  
– Press in the catch in the ignition dial and  
then pull it out from the ignition switch.  
– Insert the remote control into the ignition  
switch and start in the same way as with  
the ignition dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Manual gearbox  
Gear positions, five-speed  
Reverse gear inhibitor, five-speed  
Gear positions, six-speed (petrol)  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary. To engage reverse gear, the gear  
lever must first be put in position N. Reverse  
gear cannot therefore be engaged directly  
from fifth gear due to the reverse gear inhibi-  
tor.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear  
change. Remove your foot from the clutch  
pedal between gear changes! Follow the ap-  
propriate shifting pattern.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear  
change. Remove your foot from the clutch  
pedal between gear changes! Follow the ap-  
propriate shifting pattern.  
06  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
It can be difficult to find the positions for fifth  
and sixth gear when the car is stationary as  
the reverse gear inhibitor (which blocks side-  
ways movement towards reverse) is then not  
activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
       
06 Starting and driving  
Manual gearbox  
1
Reverse gear inhibitor, six-speed  
(petrol)  
Gear positions, six-speed (diesel)  
Reverse gear inhibitor, six-speed  
(diesel)  
Depress the clutch pedal completely for each  
gear change. Remove your foot from the  
clutch pedal between gear changes. Follow  
the indicated gear pattern. For optimum fuel  
economy use the highest possible gear as of-  
ten as possible.  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary.  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary. Engage reverse gear by pressing  
down the gear lever and moving it to the left.  
06  
NOTE  
Reverse gear is electronically blocked if the  
car is travelling faster than approx. 20 km/h.  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
The kick-down function cannot be used in  
manual gear position (Geartronic).  
Cold start  
When starting in low temperatures, the gear  
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is  
due to the gearbox oil’s viscosity at low tem-  
peratures. To minimise engine emissions, the  
gearbox shifts up later than normal when the  
engine is started at low temperatures.  
NOTE  
Safety systems  
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special  
safety systems:  
To be able to move the gear selector from  
the N position to another gear position, the  
brake pedal must be depressed and the ig-  
nition key must be in position II.  
Keylock  
To remove the ignition key, the gear selector  
must be in the P position. The key is locked  
in all other positions.  
NOTE  
Depending on the engine temperature when  
the engine is started, the idle speed after a  
cold start may be higher than normal for  
certain engine types.  
Parking position (P position)  
Stationary car with engine running:  
– Hold your foot on the brake pedal when  
moving the gear selector to another posi-  
tion.  
Kick-down  
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the  
way to the floor, beyond the position normal-  
ly regarded as full acceleration, a lower gear  
is immediately engaged. This is known as  
kick-down.  
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock  
Parking position (P position)  
To be able to move the gear selector from the  
P position to other gear positions, the ignition  
key must be in position II and the brake ped-  
al must be depressed.  
06  
If the accelerator is released from the kick-  
down position, the gearbox automatically  
changes up.  
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-  
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.  
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)  
If the gear selector is in the N position and  
the car has been stationary for at least three  
seconds (irrespective of whether the engine  
is running) then the gear selector is locked in  
the N position.  
To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control  
program has a protective downshift inhibitor  
which prevents the kick-down function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
         
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
Disengaging shiftlock  
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor  
Automatic gear positions  
In certain cases, it may be necessary to  
move the car when it is not driveable, for ex-  
ample if the battery is flat. Proceed as follows  
to move the car:  
The gear selector can be moved freely be-  
tween N and D. Other positions are locked  
with a latch that is released with the inhibitor  
button on the gear selector.  
P – Parking position  
Select position P when you wish to start the  
engine or park the car.  
06  
– There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on  
the gear selector panel. Open the rear  
edge.  
The gear selector can be moved between the  
different gear positions by pressing the inhib-  
itor button.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must be stationary when position P  
is selected.  
– Fully insert the key blade from the remote  
control.  
– Hold the key blade down and at the same  
time move the gear lever out of the P  
position.  
NOTE  
The brake pedal must be depressed to  
move the gear selector from the P position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when P  
position is engaged. Always apply the park-  
ing brake when parking the car.  
• Geartronic automatically shifts down if the  
driver allows the speed to decrease lower  
than a level suitable for the selected gear,  
in order to avoid jerking and stalling.  
Manual positions  
To move from the automatic driving  
position D to a manual position, move the  
gear selector to position M. To go from  
position M to the automatic driving  
R – Reverse  
The car must be stationary when R is select-  
ed.  
W – Winter  
The W button is used to ac-  
tivate and deactivate the  
winter programme W. Dis-  
play of the W symbol in the  
combined instrument panel  
indicates that the winter  
programme is active.  
position D, move the selector to position D.  
While driving  
N – Neutral  
The manual gearshift mode can be selected  
at any time while driving. The engaged gear  
is locked until you choose another gear.  
N is the neutral position. No gear is engaged  
and the engine can be started. Apply the  
parking brake when the car is stationary with  
the gear selector in position N.  
If the gear selector is moved to – (minus) the  
car changes down a gear and engine brakes  
at the same time as the accelerator pedal is  
released. If the gear selector is moved to  
+ (plus) the car changes up a gear.  
The winter programme starts the gearbox in  
a higher gear to facilitate starting off on slip-  
pery surfaces. The lower gears are only acti-  
vated with kick-down when the winter pro-  
gramme is engaged.  
D – Drive  
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up  
and down between the different gearbox ra-  
tios occurs automatically based on the level  
of acceleration and speed. The car should be  
stationary when the gear lever is moved from  
position R to position D.  
The selected gear is indicated on the com-  
bined instrument panel, see page 41.  
The W programme can be selected regard-  
less of the position of the gear selector, but is  
only operational when the selector is in  
position D.  
06  
NOTE  
Geartronic contains two safety functions:  
To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control  
program has a protective downshift inhibitor.  
• Geartronic does not permit downshifting/  
kick-down which would result in an engine  
speed high enough to damage the engine.  
Nothing happens if the driver tries to shift  
down in this way. The original gear re-  
mains engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
 
06 Starting and driving  
All-wheel drive  
All-wheel drive – AWD  
All-wheel drive is always engaged.  
All-wheel drive means that all four road  
wheels are driven at the same time. Power is  
automatically distributed between front and  
rear wheels. An electronically controlled  
clutch system distributes the power to the  
pair of wheels that grips best. This provides  
the best traction and prevents wheel spin.  
Under normal driving conditions, the majority  
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.  
All-wheel drive improves driving safety in  
rain, snow and icy conditions.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Brake system  
engine braking more efficiently and requires  
the foot brake for only brief periods.  
Dampness can affect braking charac-  
teristics  
Brake servo  
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the  
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be  
pressed about five times harder than when  
the engine is running. If the brake pedal is  
pressed when the engine is started, you will  
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to  
the brake servo becoming active. This may  
be more noticeable if the car has emergency  
brake assistance (EBA).  
Brake components become wet when the  
car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of  
water or when the car is washed. This may  
alter brake pad friction characteristics so that  
there is a delay before braking effect is no-  
ticed.  
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an  
additional load on the car’s brakes.  
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)  
The anti-lock braking system (ABS)  
prevents the wheels from locking  
up under braking.  
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to  
time if driving for long stretches in rain or  
slushy snow, as well as after setting off in  
very damp or cold weather. This warms up  
the braking surfaces and dries off any water.  
It is also recommended to do this before  
parking the car for a long period in such  
weather conditions.  
This means the ability to steer is  
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid  
a hazard, for example.  
WARNING  
After the engine has been started, the ABS  
will perform a brief self-test at a speed of  
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as  
pulses in the brake pedal.  
The brake servo only works when the en-  
gine is running.  
NOTE  
If the brakes are used heavily  
To get the most out of the ABS:  
If braking with the engine switched off,  
press the brake pedal sharply once, not re-  
peatedly.  
When driving in the Alps or other roads with  
similar characteristics, the car’s brakes are  
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not  
being depressed especially hard.  
– Depress brake pedal with full force. Pulses  
will be felt.  
06  
– Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do  
not release the pressure on the pedal.  
Brake circuits  
Because speed is often low, the brakes are  
not cooled as effectively as when driving on  
flat roads at higher speed.  
Practice braking with the ABS system in a  
traffic-free area and in different weather con-  
ditions.  
This symbol lights if a brake circuit  
is not working.  
If a fault should occur in one of the  
circuits, it is still possible to brake  
the car. The brake pedal will travel further  
and may feel softer than normal. Harder  
pressure on the pedal is needed to produce  
the normal braking effect.  
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down  
when driving downhill instead of using the  
foot brake. Use the same gear driving down-  
hill as you would use driving uphill. This uses  
The ABS symbol comes on for two seconds  
if there was a fault in the ABS system when  
the engine was last running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
       
06 Starting and driving  
Brake system  
Emergency brake assistance – EBA  
NOTE  
(Emergency brake assistance) In case of  
sudden braking, full-strength braking is pro-  
vided instantaneously. The EBA function  
senses when heavy braking is underway by  
registering how quickly the brake pedal is de-  
pressed. Continue braking without easing off  
on the brake pedal. The function is suspend-  
ed when the pressure on the brake pedal  
eases. This function is always active and  
cannot be disengaged.  
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-  
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)  
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the  
brake pedal is released then all braking  
ceases.  
WARNING  
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols are  
lit at the same time, a fault may have oc-  
curred in the brake system. If the level in the  
brake fluid reservoir is normal, drive careful-  
ly to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop  
to have the brake system checked.  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the  
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further be-  
fore topping up the brake fluid.  
06  
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must  
be investigated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
06 Starting and driving  
Stability and traction control system  
Traction control system  
General  
Reduced operation  
The function is active at low speed and trans-  
fers power from the driving wheel that is  
spinning to the one that is not.  
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control  
system (STC/DSTC) improves the car’s trac-  
tion and helps the driver to avoid skidding.  
A pulsing sound may be noticed during brak-  
ing or acceleration when the system is in ac-  
tion. The car may accelerate more slowly  
than expected.  
The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC  
depending on market. The table shows the  
integral functions of the respective systems.  
Function/system  
STC  
DSTC  
The stability system is activated automatical-  
ly each time the car is started.  
Active Yaw Control  
Spin Control  
X
X
X
X
X
System operation during skidding and accel-  
eration can be partially deactivated.  
06  
Traction control system  
Operation during skidding is delayed and so  
allows more skidding which provides greater  
freedom for dynamic driving.  
Active Yaw Control  
The function limits the driving and brake  
force of the wheels individually in order to  
stabilise the car.  
Traction in deep snow or sand is improved as  
acceleration is no longer limited.  
Operation  
– Turn thumbwheel (A) until the STC/ DSTC  
menu is shown.  
Spin Control  
The function prevents the driving wheels  
from spinning against the road surface dur-  
ing acceleration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
         
06 Starting and driving  
Stability and traction control system  
DSTC ON means that the system function is  
unchanged.  
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED means that  
the system has been disabled due to a fault.  
• Constant glow after deactivation reminds  
that the STC/DSTC system has been re-  
duced.  
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that sys-  
tem operation is reduced.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
If the message remains when the engine is  
restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
– Press and hold RESET (B) until the  
STC/DSTC menu is changed.  
At the same time the symbol  
illuminates  
as a reminder that the system has been re-  
duced. The system remains reduced until the  
engine is next started.  
Symbols in the combined instrument  
panel  
DSTC system  
Information  
WARNING  
Suppressing system function may alter the  
driving characteristics of the car.  
NOTE  
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds in  
If the symbols  
the same time, read the message on the in-  
formation display.  
and  
are displayed at  
06  
the display and the  
symbol illuminates  
each time the engine is started  
If the symbol  
appear as follows:  
appears alone then it may  
Messages in the information display  
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF  
means that the system has been temporarily  
reduced due to excessive brake disc temper-  
ature.  
• Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC  
system is now being activated.  
• Constant glow for two seconds means  
system check when the engine is started.  
The function is reactivated automatically  
when the brakes have cooled.  
• Constant glow after starting the engine or  
while driving means that there is a fault in  
the STC/DSTC system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
   
06 Starting and driving  
Parking assistance (option)  
1
The system must be deactivated when re-  
versing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the  
towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike  
carrier would trigger the sensors.  
Function  
General  
The system is activated automatically when  
the car is started and the text message Park  
Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on  
the audio system display.  
Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto-  
matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo gen-  
uine trailer cable is used.  
Parking assistance is active at speeds below  
15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher  
speeds. The system is reactivated when the  
speed falls below 10 km/h again.  
Front parking assistance  
The distance covered to the front of the car is  
about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the  
front loudspeakers.  
The frequency of the signal increases as you  
come closer to an object in front of or behind  
the car. If the volume of another sound  
source from the audio system is high, this is  
automatically muted.  
Front parking assistance cannot be com-  
bined with extra lights because the sensors  
are affected by the extra lights.  
Parking assistance front and rear  
The tone becomes constant at a distance of  
about 30 cm. If there are objects within this  
distance both behind and in front of the car,  
the signal alternates between left and right-  
hand speakers.  
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-  
ing. A signal indicates the distance to a de-  
tected object.  
Fault indicator  
If the information symbol illumi-  
nates with constant glow and  
PARK ASSIST SERVICE  
REQUIRED is shown on the infor-  
mation display then parking assistance is  
disengaged.  
06  
WARNING  
Rear parking assistance  
Parking assistance does not relinquish the  
driver’s own responsibility during parking.  
The sensors have blind spots where objects  
cannot be detected. Be aware of children  
and animals near the car.  
The distance covered to the rear of the car is  
about 1.5 m. Rear parking assistance is acti-  
vated when reverse gear is engaged. If the  
system is switched off, the audio system dis-  
play shows the text Park Assist deactivated  
Enter to activate as soon as reverse gear is  
engaged. The signal comes from the rear  
loudspeakers.  
WARNING  
Some sources may deceive the system with  
false signals. Examples of such sources in-  
clude horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumat-  
ic brakes and motorcycle exhaust pipes. Ice  
and snow covering the sensors may also  
cause false warning signals.  
1
Depending on the market, the Parking assist-  
ance system may be either standard, an op-  
tion or an accessory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Parking assistance (option)  
Activating/deactivating  
Cleaning the sensors  
Parking assistance can be deactivated by  
pressing EXIT on the control panel, see  
page 66. Park Assist deactivated Enter to  
activate will then appear on the audio sys-  
tem display. Parking assistance can be reac-  
tivated by pressing ENTER on the control  
panel. The display then shows Park Assist  
active Exit to deactivate.  
Parking assistance sensors  
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to en-  
sure that they work properly. Clean them with  
water and car shampoo.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Blind Spot Information System BLIS (option)  
attention to vehicles moving in the same di-  
rection in the so-called "blind spot".  
General  
Blind spots  
The system is designed to work most effec-  
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-  
lane highways.  
BLIS is based on digital camera technology.  
The cameras (1) are located under the door  
mirrors.  
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside  
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)  
comes on with a constant glow.  
NOTE  
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car  
where the system has detected the vehicle.  
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the  
same time then both lamps come on.  
"Blind spots" covered by BLIS cameras.  
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.  
Distance A = approx. 3.0 m  
Distance B = approx. 9.5 m  
Cleaning  
In order to work most effectively the BLIS  
camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can  
be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.  
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not  
scratched.  
1. BLIS camera  
2. Indicator lamp  
3. BLIS symbol  
06  
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a  
fault arises in the system. If for example the  
system’s cameras are obscured then the  
BLIS indicator lamp flashes and the informa-  
tion display shows a message. In such cas-  
es, check and clean the lenses. If necessary,  
the system can be switched off temporarily  
by pressing the BLIS button, see page 129.  
WARNING  
The system is a supplement to, not a re-  
placement for, a safe driving style and use  
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace  
the driver’s attention and responsibility. The  
responsibility for changing lanes safely al-  
ways rests with the driver.  
IMPORTANT  
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice  
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away  
from the lenses.  
BLIS is an information system that under cer-  
tain conditions can help to draw the driver’s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
       
06 Starting and driving  
Blind Spot Information System BLIS (option)  
tected by the system. This means for exam-  
Activating/deactivating  
When BLIS operates  
ple that the system does not react to a trailer  
without headlamps which is towed behind a  
car or truck.  
The system operates when the car is driven  
at a speed above 10 km/h.  
Overtaking  
WARNING  
The system is designed to react if you over-  
take another vehicle at a speed of up to  
10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.  
The system does not react to bicycles or  
mopeds.  
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by in-  
tensive light or when driving in the dark  
when there are no light sources (e.g. street  
lighting or other vehicles). The system may  
then interpret the lack of light as if the cam-  
eras have been blocked.  
In both cases a message is shown on the  
information display.  
When driving in such conditions system  
performance may be temporarily reduced  
and a text message is shown, see  
page 130.  
The system is designed to react if you are  
overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to  
70 km/h faster than your vehicle.  
WARNING  
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.  
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-  
ing.  
A wide trailer coupled to the car can con-  
ceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can  
prevent the vehicle in the screened area  
from being detected by BLIS.  
Button for activating/deactivating.  
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.  
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash  
three times when BLIS is activated.  
06  
If the message disappears automatically  
then BLIS has returned to normal function-  
ality.  
The system can be deactivated/activated by  
pressing BLIS.  
Daylight and darkness  
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar  
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in  
heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.  
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the but-  
ton goes out and a text message is shown on  
the dashboard display.  
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of  
the surrounding vehicles. The system is de-  
signed to detect motor vehicles such as cars,  
trucks, buses and motorcycles.  
When BLIS is activated the light in the button  
illuminates, a new text message is shown on  
the display and the indicator lamps in the  
door panels flash three times. Press the  
In darkness the system reacts to the head-  
lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with  
headlamps that are switched off are not de-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Blind Spot Information System BLIS (option)  
READ button to clear the text message. For  
more information on messages, see page 46.  
BLIS system message  
Text on the  
System status  
display  
BLIND-SPOT  
SYST SERVICE  
REQUIRED  
Blind spot syst. disen-  
gaged.  
Contactanauthorised  
Volvo workshop.  
BLIS FUNCTION  
REDUCED  
Reduced function.  
BLIND-SPOT  
SYST CAMERA  
BLOCKED  
One or both cameras  
blocked.  
Clean the lenses.  
BLIND-SPOT  
INFO SYSTEM  
OFF  
BLIS system off.  
BLIS system on.  
06  
BLIND-SPOT  
INFO SYSTEM ON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Towing and recovery  
than 80 km. The car must always be towed  
facing forward.  
Never tow the car to bump start it  
Recovery  
If only partially raised, cars with automatic  
gearbox must not be transported at speeds  
above 80 km/h or further than 80 km. During  
such transport, the wheels must always roll  
forward.  
Jump start the car with a donor battery if the  
battery is flat and the engine does not start.  
Do not bump start the car.  
WARNING  
The steering lock stays in the position it was  
in when the power was cut off. The steering  
lock must be unlocked before towing.  
IMPORTANT  
Bump starting the car can damage the cata-  
lytic converter.  
The ignition key must be in position II.  
Never remove the ignition key from the igni-  
tion switch while driving or when the car is  
being towed.  
Towing eye  
Towing  
Find out the highest legal speed for towing  
before towing the car.  
WARNING  
The brake servo and power steering do not  
work when the engine is switched off. The  
brake pedal must be pressed about five  
times harder than normal, and the steering  
will be considerable heavier than normal.  
– Turn the ignition switch to position II and  
unlock the steering lock so that the car  
can be steered, see page 114.  
– The ignition key must remain in position II  
while the car is being towed.  
06  
Automatic gearbox:  
– Move the gear selector to position N.  
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be  
towed on the road. The towing eye is at-  
tached in the recess on the right-hand side of  
the front or rear bumper. To fit the towing  
eye:  
Manual gearbox:  
– Move gear lever into neutral.  
– Ensure the towrope is always taut to avoid  
violent jerks. Keep your foot on the brake  
pedal.  
1. Take out the towing eye that is located  
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.  
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be  
towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
       
06 Starting and driving  
Towing and recovery  
2. Release the cover (1) on the bumper  
with a screwdriver or coin in the bottom  
edge.  
3. Screw in the towing eye (3) firmly, right  
up to the flange. Use the wheel wrench  
to tighten the towing eye.  
4. After use, unscrew the towing eye and  
return it in the cargo area. Refit the  
cover on the bumper.  
IMPORTANT  
The towing eye is only designed for towing  
on roads, not for pulling the car unstuck or  
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for as-  
sistance.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
06 Starting and driving  
Start assistance  
ensure that the cars do not touch one  
another.  
Starting with a donor battery  
WARNING  
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. One spark, which  
can be generated if you connect the jump  
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the  
battery explode.  
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which  
can cause serious burns. If the acid comes  
into contact with eyes, skin or clothing,  
flush with large quantities of water.  
– Connect the red jump lead between the  
positive terminal on the donor battery (1+)  
and the one in your car (2+).  
– Connect one end of the black jump lead to  
the donor battery’s negative terminal  
(3–).  
– Connect the other end of the black jump  
lead to the earthing point (4–) by the left-  
hand strut tower.  
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical  
attention immediately.  
– Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the  
engine run a few minutes at a speed  
slightly higher than idle 1500 rpm.  
– Start the engine of the car with the flat  
battery.  
If the battery in the car has become flat, you  
can "borrow" electric current from either a  
separate battery or the battery in another car.  
Always make sure the crocodile clips on the  
jump leads are attached securely to eliminate  
sparks during the start attempt.  
– Remove the jump leads, first the black and  
then the red. Ensure that neither of the  
black jump lead’s clips comes into contact  
with the battery’s positive terminal or the  
crocodile clip on the red jump lead.  
06  
When jump starting the car, the following  
steps are recommended to avoid risk of ex-  
plosion:  
IMPORTANT  
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the  
start procedure. This could cause sparking.  
– Turn the ignition key to position 0.  
– Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.  
– If the donor battery is in another car,  
switch off the engine in the other car and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Driving with a trailer  
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is  
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at  
least 1000 km.  
General  
Trailer weights  
Information on permitted trailer weights, see  
page 229.  
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-  
sories mounted on the car, such as a towbar,  
load carriers, space box, the passengers’  
combined weight etc. as well as the load on  
the towball. The load capacity of the car is  
reduced by the number of passengers and  
their weight.  
• The brakes are loaded much more than  
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.  
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your  
speed.  
WARNING  
Follow the stated recommendations for  
trailer weights. Otherwise, the rig may be  
difficult to control during evasive manoeu-  
vres and braking.  
• The engine is loaded more heavily than  
usual when driving with a trailer.  
If the towing bracket is fitted by an author-  
ised Volvo workshop, then the car is deliv-  
ered with the necessary equipment for driv-  
ing with a trailer.  
• The engine and gearbox can overheat if  
the car is driven with a heavy load in hot  
weather. If the temperature gauge for the  
engine’s cooling system goes into the red  
zone, stop and let the engine idle for a few  
minutes. The automatic gearbox responds  
through a built-in protection system. See  
the message on the information display. If  
the car overheats, the air conditioning may  
be switched off temporarily.  
NOTE  
The stated maximum permitted trailer  
weights are those permitted by Volvo. Na-  
tional vehicle regulations can further limit  
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be  
certified for higher towing weights than the  
car can actually tow.  
• The car’s towing bracket must be of an  
approved type.  
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your  
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped  
for driving with a trailer.  
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the  
weight on the towing bracket follows the  
specified maximum towball load.  
• In the interests of safety, speed should be  
restricted to 80 km/h, even if the laws of  
certain countries allow for higher speeds.  
06  
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-  
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre  
pressure decal location, see page 153.  
• Move the gear selector to parking  
position P when parking an automatic car  
with a hitched trailer. Always use the park-  
ing brake. Block the wheels with chocks  
when parking a car with hitched trailer on  
a hill.  
• Clean the towbar regularly and grease the  
1
towball .  
1
Does not apply to the towball if using a stabi-  
liser hitch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Driving with a trailer  
Automatic gearbox, driving with a  
trailer  
Diesel 1.6D engine with manual  
gearbox, driving with a trailer  
If the car is driven with a major load in a hot  
climate, the engine cooling fan can be re-  
placed with one of a greater capacity than  
the standard model. Check with your nearest  
Volvo dealer regarding the options for your  
car.  
Parking on a hill  
1. Apply the parking brake (handbrake).  
2. Move the gear selector to parking  
position P.  
Starting on a hill  
1. Move the gear selector to driving  
position D.  
2. Release the parking brake (handbrake).  
Steep inclines  
• Select an appropriate manual gear posi-  
tion when climbing steep inclines or at low  
speeds. This prevents the gearbox from  
changing up and keeps the gearbox oil  
cooler.  
06  
• Do not use a higher manual gear than the  
engine can "handle". It is not always eco-  
nomical to drive in high gears.  
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of  
more than 15 %.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Towing equipment  
Towbars  
Trailer cable  
The towball must be cleaned and greased  
regularly. If a towball hitch with vibration  
damper is used, it is not necessary to grease  
the towball.  
If the car is equipped with a detachable tow-  
bar, the towball mounting instructions must  
be followed carefully, see page 138.  
WARNING  
Be sure to attach the trailer’s safety cable to  
the correct place.  
WARNING  
An adapter is required if the car’s towbar has  
13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin  
electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by  
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on  
the ground.  
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable  
towbar:  
Follow the assembly instructions for the  
towball section carefully.  
The towball section must be locked with the  
key before setting off.  
06  
Check that the indicator window shows  
green.  
NOTE  
Always take off the towball section after  
use. Keep it in the cargo area  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Towing equipment  
Specifications  
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
06  
Fixed or detachable  
towbar  
1060  
90  
964  
482  
40  
141  
497  
150  
113  
100  
140  
1
2
Side member  
Ball centre  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
Fitting the towball  
– Ensure that the mechanism is in the un-  
locked position by turning the key clock-  
wise.  
– Check that the indicator window (3) shows  
red. If the window does not show red,  
press in (1) and turn the locking wheel  
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.  
– Remove the guard plug.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
– Turn the key anticlockwise to the locked  
position. Remove the key from the lock.  
– Check that the indicator window shows  
green.  
– Insert the towball section until your hear a  
click.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Check that the towball section is secure by  
pulling it up, down and back. If the towball  
section is not fitted correctly then it must be  
removed and refitted in accordance with  
the previous steps  
The trailer’s safety cable must be attached  
to the attachment on the towbar.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
Removing the towball  
– Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it  
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.  
– Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it  
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position  
while pulling the towball rearward and  
upward.  
– Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the  
unlocked position.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
 
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
– Insert the guard plug.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
06 Starting and driving  
Loading  
• Put wide loads in the centre.  
General  
Load carriers  
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as  
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a  
lowered backrest.  
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum  
possible safety while driving, it is recom-  
mended to use load carriers specially de-  
signed for your car by Volvo.  
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-  
sories mounted on the car, such as a towbar,  
load carriers, space box, the passengers’  
combined weight etc. as well as the load on  
the towball. The load capacity of the car is  
reduced by the number of passengers and  
their weight. For information on permitted  
weights, see page 229.  
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to  
avoid damaging the upholstery or the  
large glass surface of the tailgate.  
Carefully follow the mounting instructions  
supplied with the carriers.  
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-  
lets with straps or web lashings.  
• Check periodically that the load carriers  
and load are properly secured. Lash the  
load securely with retaining straps.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• Distribute the load evenly over the load  
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the  
bottom.  
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a  
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry  
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.  
The car’s driving characteristics change de-  
pending on how heavily it is loaded and how  
the load is distributed.  
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,  
and therefore fuel consumption, increase  
with the load’s size.  
WARNING  
Loading the cargo area  
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake  
when loading or unloading long objects. The  
gear lever or gear selector could be knocked  
out of position by long loads, which could set  
the car in motion.  
Never load cargo above the backrest.  
• Drive gently. Avoid quick accelerations,  
heavy braking and taking curves hard.  
The protection provided by the inflatable  
curtain in the headlining may be compro-  
mised or eliminated by high loads.  
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-  
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing  
personal injury.  
06  
WARNING  
The car’s centre of gravity and driving char-  
acteristics are altered by roof loads.  
To increase the size of the cargo area, the  
head restraints can be removed and the  
seats folded down, see page 88.  
Place the load firmly against the backrest in  
front.  
• The head rests can be removed so that  
they are not damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
     
06 Starting and driving  
Adjusting headlamp pattern  
Halogen headlamps  
Bi-Xenon headlamps  
Correct light pattern for left or right-  
hand traffic  
The headlamp control should be in  
position (A) for left-hand traffic and  
position (B) for right-hand traffic.  
The headlamp control should be in  
position (A) for left-hand traffic and  
position (B) for right-hand traffic.  
A. Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.  
B. Right-hand traffic.  
The headlamps’ projection can be adjusted  
to avoid dazzling other motorists. The correct  
pattern will also better illuminate the verge.  
06  
WARNING  
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps the re-  
placement must be carried out by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps  
must be handled with extreme care due to  
the high-voltage unit in the Xenon lamp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
     
06 Starting and driving  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
   
General................................................................................................... 148  
Tyre pressure.......................................................................................... 152  
Warning triangle and spare wheel.......................................................... 154  
Changing wheels.................................................................................... 156  
Emergency puncture repair.................................................................... 158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
WHEELS AND TYRES  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Driving characteristics and tyres  
Speed ratings  
New tyres  
The car has "Whole Vehicle Type Approval",  
which means that dimensions and speed rat-  
ings must not differ from those specified on  
the vehicle’s registration document. The only  
exception to these conditions is winter tyres  
(both those with metal studs and those with-  
out). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not  
be driven faster than the speed rating of the  
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a  
maximum of 160 km/h).  
Tyres are perishable. After a  
few years they begin to  
The tyres greatly affect the car’s driving char-  
acteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre  
pressure and speed rating are important for  
how the car performs.  
harden at the same time as  
the friction capacity/char-  
acteristics gradually deteri-  
orate. Therefore aim to get  
as fresh tyres as possible  
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the  
same type and dimensions, and preferably  
also the same make, are fitted to all four  
wheels. Follow the recommended tyre pres-  
sures specified on the tyre pressure label,  
see page 152.  
when you replace them. This is especially im-  
portant with regard to winter tyres. The week  
and year of manufacture, the tyre’s DOT  
marking (Department of Transportation), are  
stated with four digits, for example 1502. The  
tyre in the illustration was manufactured in  
week 15 of 2002.  
Remember that traffic regulations determine  
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed  
class of the tyres.  
Designation of dimensions  
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.  
Example:  
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.  
205/55R16 91 W.  
Tyre age  
Q
T
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)  
205  
55  
Section width (mm)  
All tyres older than six years should be  
checked by an expert even if they seem un-  
damaged. The reason for this is that tyres  
age and decompose, even if they are hardly  
ever or never used. The function can there-  
fore be affected due to the tyre’s constituent  
materials being broken down. In such a case  
the tyre should then not be used. This also  
applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres  
saved for future use. Examples of external  
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuita-  
ble for use are cracks or discoloration.  
190 km/h  
210 km/h  
240 km/h  
270 km/h  
300 km/h  
Ratio between section height and  
width (%)  
H
V
R
Radial ply  
W
Y
16  
91  
W
Rim diameter in inches (")  
Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)  
Speed rating (in this case 270 km/h).  
07  
The age of the tyre can be determined by the  
DOT marking, see illustration above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
         
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-  
ing up, and not standing up.  
More even wear and maintenance  
NOTE  
The legal provisions for the use of studded  
tyres vary from country to country.  
Tyres with tread wear indicators  
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless  
bands across the width of the tread. On the  
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread  
Wear Indicator). When the tyre’s tread depth  
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be  
level in height with the tread wear indicators.  
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.  
Remember that tyres with little tread depth  
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.  
Tread depth  
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-  
peratures place considerably higher de-  
mands on tyres than summer conditions. It is  
therefore not recommended to drive on win-  
ter tyres that have a tread depth of less than  
four millimetres.  
Snow chains  
Winter tyres  
Snow chains may only be used on the front  
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive  
cars.  
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu-  
lar dimensions. These are stated on the tyre  
pressure label, see page 152 for its location.  
The tyre dimensions are dependent on the  
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,  
these must be fitted to all four wheels.  
Tread wear indicators  
The correct tyre pressure results in more  
even wear, see page 153. To achieve the  
best traction and more even wear on the  
tyres, the regular switching of the front and  
rear tyres with each other is recommended.  
The first change should be after 5000 km and  
then at intervals of 10000 km, this is to avoid  
differences in tread depth. Tyres with the  
greatest tread depth should always be fitted  
to the rear wheels to decrease the risk of  
skidding. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop for an inspection if you are uncertain  
about tread depth.  
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow  
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this  
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.  
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space  
between the brake disks and the wheels is  
too small .  
NOTE  
07  
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types  
are most suitable.  
IMPORTANT  
Studded tyres  
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-  
lent chains designed for the car model, and  
tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author-  
ised Volvo workshop  
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently  
for 500–1000 km so the studs settle properly  
into the tyre. This gives the tyre, and espe-  
cially the studs, a longer lifespan.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
   
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)  
Steel rims are normally mounted with the  
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn va-  
riety may also be used.  
Rims and wheel nuts  
Spare wheel Temporary Spare  
The spare wheel is only intended to be used  
for the short time it takes to get the ordinary  
wheel replaced or repaired. Replace the  
spare wheel as soon as possible with a nor-  
mal wheel. The car’s handling may be altered  
by the use of the spare wheel.  
1
WARNING  
Never use standard nuts for aluminium  
rims. The wheels can come loose.  
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare  
wheel on the car.  
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel  
nuts (2)  
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with  
aluminium rims. These differ markedly from  
other nut types as they have a rotating coni-  
cal washer.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must never be driven fitted with  
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.  
Standard (1) and bulge acorn (2) wheel nuts  
Only use rims that are tested and approved  
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-  
sories. There are two types of wheel nut, de-  
pending on whether the rims are made of  
steel or aluminium. Tighten the wheel nuts to  
90 Nm. Check the torque with a torque  
wrench.  
NOTE  
These nuts may also be used with steel  
rims.  
Locking wheel nuts  
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-  
minium and steel rims. If steel rims with lock-  
ing nuts are used in combination with wheel  
covers, the locking wheel nut should be  
mounted on the bolt nearest the air valve.  
Otherwise the wheel cover cannot be fitted to  
the rim.  
07  
IMPORTANT  
The wheel nuts should be tightened to  
90 Nm. Overtightening can damage the  
nuts and the bolts.  
1
Certain variants and markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
   
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
and capacity to force rain, snow and slush  
out of the way are adversely affected.  
Summer and winter wheels  
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should al-  
ways be fitted to the rear of the car (to de-  
crease the risk of skidding).  
Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-  
ing up, and not standing up.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you  
are uncertain about tread depth.  
The arrow shows the tyre’s direction of rotation  
When summer and winter wheels are  
changed they should be marked with which  
side of the car they were mounted on, for ex-  
ample L for left and R for right. Tyres with  
tread patterns which are designed to only ro-  
tate in one direction have the direction of ro-  
tation marked with an arrow on the tyre.  
07  
The tyre should always rotate in the same di-  
rection throughout its lifespan. Tyres should  
only be switched between front and rear po-  
sitions, never between left and right-hand  
sides, or vice versa. If the tyre is mounted in-  
correctly, the car’s braking characteristics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
 
07 Wheels and tyres  
Tyre pressure  
Checking the tyre pressure  
Check the tyre pressure regularly.  
Recommended tyre pressure  
NOTE  
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a  
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also  
varies depending on ambient temperature.  
Even after several kilometres of driving the  
tyres warm up and the pressure increases, so  
air must not be released if the pressure is  
checked when the tyres are warm, while the  
pressure must be increased if it is too low. In-  
adequately inflated tyres adversely affect fuel  
consumption, tyre lifespan and the car’s  
roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pres-  
sure that is too low can also result in the tyres  
overheating and disintegrating.  
The tyre pressure label on the driver’s side  
door pillar shows which pressures the tyres  
should have at different load and speed con-  
ditions.  
For information on the correct tyre pressure,  
refer to the tyre pressure table on page 153.  
("Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same  
temperature as the ambient temperature.)  
Stated on the decal:  
• Tyre pressure for the car’s recommended  
wheel size  
07  
Fuel economy, ECO pressure  
• ECO pressure  
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre  
pressure for full load is recommended in or-  
der to obtain optimum fuel economy.  
• Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).  
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road  
noise and steering characteristics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
           
07 Wheels and tyres  
Tyre pressure  
Tyre pressure table  
Speed  
(km/h)  
Load,1-3 persons  
Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)  
Max. load  
Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)  
Variant  
Tyre size  
1.6  
195/65 R15 91V  
0 – 160  
160+  
210  
250  
210  
210  
250  
280  
250  
260  
1.8  
205/55 R16 91V/W  
2.0  
1.6D  
195/65 R15 91Q/T/H/V M+S  
205/55 R16 91Q/T/H/V M+S  
205/50 R17 93W Extra Load  
0–160  
160 +  
220  
260  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
260  
215/45 R18 93W Extra Load  
205/50 R17 93Q/T/H/V M+S Extra Load  
2.4  
2.4i  
2.0D  
205/55 R16 91V/W  
0–160  
160+  
0–160  
160+  
210  
250  
220  
260  
210  
210  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
280  
250  
260  
250  
260  
205/55 R16 91Q/T/H/V M+S  
205/50 R17 93W Extra Load  
215/45 R18 93W Extra Load  
205/50 R17 93Q/T/H/V M+S Extra Load  
T5  
205/55 R16 91V/W  
0–160  
160+  
0–160  
160+  
210  
260  
220  
270  
210  
210  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
290  
250  
260  
250  
270  
205/55 R16 91Q/T/H/V M+S  
205/50 R17 93W Extra Load  
215/45 R18 93W Extra Load  
205/50 R17 93Q/T/H/V M+S Extra Load  
D5  
All  
205/55 R16 91 V/W  
0–160  
160+  
230  
270  
220  
220  
250  
290  
250  
270  
205/50 R17 93W Extra Load  
215/45 R18 93W Extra Load  
205/55 R16 91Q /T/H/V M+S  
205/50 R17 93Q/T/H/V M+S Extra Load  
07  
1
1
1
1
All  
0–160  
0 – 80  
250  
420  
250  
420  
250  
420  
250  
420  
2
T125/85R16 99M  
Spare wheel  
1
ECO pressure, see page 152  
Temporary Spare  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
       
07 Wheels and tyres  
Warning triangle and spare wheel  
Warning triangle  
The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of the  
boot lid with two clips.  
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-  
ing triangle . Position the warning triangle in  
1
a suitable place with regard to traffic.  
– Undo the case containing the warning  
triangle, it is attached with Velcro. Take  
the warning triangle out of the case.  
– Lower the warning triangle’s support legs.  
07  
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are  
properly secured in the cargo area after use.  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
     
07 Wheels and tyres  
Warning triangle and spare wheel  
Spare wheel and jack  
The car’s original jack  
The original jack should only be used for  
Putting the spare wheel and jack into  
the cargo area:  
1
changing wheels. The jack’s thread should  
always be well greased.  
– Crank the jack (1) to halfway. The marking  
on the plate (2) should line up with the  
marking on the arm (3) so that the jack can  
fit lying down in the holder.  
The spare wheel, jack and wheel spanner are  
found under the floor in the cargo area.  
– Fold in the handle (4) and place the wheel  
wrench (5) on the jack.  
07  
Taking out the spare wheel  
– Fold the rear edge of the floor mat for-  
ward.  
– Put the jack (1) back in the hole on the  
right (6). Fasten the spare wheel (7) in the  
hole on the left (8).  
– Release the spare wheel and lift it out.  
– Take out the jack and the wheel spanner.  
1
Certain variants and markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
   
07 Wheels and tyres  
Changing wheels  
Removing wheels  
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be  
replaced at a busy location. Make sure that  
the car and jack are on a firm horizontal sur-  
face.  
– Cars with steel rims have removable wheel  
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the  
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by  
hand.  
– Two jacking points are located on each  
side of the car. Wind down the jack’s base  
so that it sits level on the ground. Check  
that the jack is seated correctly in the  
jacking point, as illustrated, and that the  
base is located directly under it.  
– Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anticlock-  
wise with the wheel spanner.  
– Take out the spare wheel, jack and wheel  
spanner, which are found under the carpet  
in the cargo area.  
– Jack up the car high enough that the  
wheel is clear of the ground. Remove the  
wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.  
07  
– Apply the parking brake and engage first  
gear, or position P if the car has an auto-  
matic gearbox.  
– Place chocks in front of and behind the  
wheels which will remain on the ground.  
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
     
07 Wheels and tyres  
Changing wheels  
Fitting the wheel  
– Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel  
and hub.  
– Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.  
– Lower the car so that the wheel cannot  
rotate.  
– Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is  
important that the wheel nuts are tight-  
ened properly. Tighten to 90 Nm. Check  
the torque with a torque spanner.  
– Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).  
WARNING  
Never crawl under the car when it is raised  
on the jack.  
Passengers must leave the car when it is  
raised on the jack.  
Ensure that passengers wait with the car -  
or preferably a crash barrier - between them  
and the road.  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
 
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
General  
Cars which do not have a spare wheel are in-  
stead equipped with an emergency puncture  
repair kit. This kit can be used to both seal  
the puncture and to check and adjust the tyre  
pressure. The kit consists of an electric air  
compressor and an integrated canister with  
sealing liquid.  
The expiration date is located on the front of  
the compressor, see the illustration on  
page 163.  
Emergency puncture repair kit  
The emergency puncture repair kit is only in-  
tended to work as a temporary repair so that  
the car can be driven a further 200 km (max.)  
or to the nearest tyre centre. The sealing fluid  
has the ability to effectively seal tyres which  
have punctures in the tread.  
1
See page 163 for information on canister re-  
placement.  
07  
NOTE  
The sealing fluid canister should be replaced  
before its expiration date or after use of the  
puncture repair kit.  
The emergency puncture repair kit is only  
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in  
the tread.  
NOTE  
The jack is an option on cars equipped with  
emergency puncture repair kit.  
1
Certain variants and markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
     
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
The emergency puncture repair kit has limit-  
ed abilities to seal tyres which have punc-  
tures in the wall of the tyre. Do not seal tyres  
with the emergency puncture repair kit if they  
have larger slits, cracks, irregularities or simi-  
lar damage.  
The emergency puncture repair kit with com-  
pressor and tools are found under the floor in  
the cargo area.  
12 V sockets for the compressor are located  
by the centre console in the front, by the rear  
seat and in the cargo area. Choose the elec-  
trical socket that is nearest the punctured  
tyre.  
WARNING  
The sealing fluid may cause irritation if it  
comes into direct contact with skin. In the  
case of contact with skin, wash away the  
fluid with soap and water.  
Taking out the emergency puncture  
repair kit  
07  
– Fold away the rear edge of the floor mat,  
forward from the back.  
– Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Inflating tyres  
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre must be  
inflated in an area close to traffic.  
– Start the compressor by flicking the  
switch (2) to position I.  
afterwards as there is a risk of overheat-  
ing.  
– Pump up the tyre to the pressure specified  
on the tyre pressure label.  
– Objects with a volume up to 50 litres can  
be inflated with the compressor.  
– Ensure that the orange switch (2) is in  
position 0 and take out the lead (5) and air  
hose (4) from the side compartment (3).  
– Turn off the compressor, the switch (2)  
should be in position 0. Detach the air  
hose and unplug the lead. Replace the  
valve’s dust cap.  
WARNING  
– Screw the air hose’s valve connection to  
the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s air  
valve.  
07  
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in  
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-  
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-  
cient ventilation.  
– Put the lead (5) and air hose (4) into the  
side compartment (3).  
– Connect the lead (5) to one of the car’s  
12 V sockets.  
– Put the puncture repair kit back.  
– Start the engine. The car must be in a well-  
ventilated place.  
– The compressor should not run for more  
than ten minutes at a time. Let it cool  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Sealing punctured tyres  
Set up the warning triangle if emergency tyre  
repairs must be carried out in an area where  
there is other traffic.  
– Connect the lead (5) to one of the car’s  
12 V sockets.  
– Start the compressor by flicking the  
switch (2) to position I. There will be a  
temporary pressure increase of max. 4 bar  
while the sealing fluid is pumped in. After  
approx. one minute, the pressure will drop  
and the gauge will indicate the correct tyre  
pressure.  
– Release the safety catch (6) and turn the  
orange-coloured part (7) 90 degrees to the  
vertical position, until a click is heard.  
– Remove the decal (1) regarding the high-  
est permitted speed from the emergency  
puncture repair kit and stick it on the  
steering wheel where it can be clearly  
seen by the driver.  
– Start the engine. The car must be in a well-  
ventilated place.  
07  
– Pump the tyre to a pressure of between  
1.8 bar and 3.5 bar. If the pressure does  
not reach 1.8 bar after ten minutes of  
pumping, the compressor should be  
turned off so it does not overheat.  
WARNING  
– Ensure that the orange switch (2) is in  
position 0 and take out the lead (5) and air  
hose (4) from the side compartment (3).  
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in  
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-  
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suffi-  
cient ventilation.  
– Screw the air hose’s valve connection to  
the bottom of the thread on the tyre’s air  
valve.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Check the tyre pressure again:  
NOTE  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT  
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-  
pressor is running. Be particularly observ-  
ant of the tyre walls. If cracks, irregularities  
or other damage appears, turn off the com-  
pressor immediately. Under these circum-  
stances your journey should not continue.  
Contact an authorised tyre centre.  
Do not raise the orange-coloured part (7)  
when only the compressor is to be used for  
inflation.  
The compressor should not run for more  
than ten minutes at a time. Let it cool after-  
wards as there is a risk of overheating.  
– Connect the air hose (4) to the air valve on  
the tyre. Connect the lead (5) to the 12 V  
power point. Read the pressure on the  
compressor. If the tyre pressure is below  
1.3 bar, the tyre has not been sufficiently  
well sealed. The journey should not be  
continued under these circumstances.  
Contact a tyre centre.  
NOTE  
The canister with sealant and hose should  
be replaced after use.  
– Undo the air hose (4) from the air valve  
and put the dust cap back on. Unplug the  
lead (5) from the electrical socket. Fold the  
orange-coloured part (7) back into its orig-  
inal position and secure the catch (6).  
Keep the emergency repair kit in a safe  
place in the car.  
– If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,  
the tyre should be pumped up to the  
pressure stated on the tyre pressure label,  
for location see page 152. Relieve pres-  
sure with the reduction valve (8) if the tyre  
pressure is too high.  
– Immediately drive about 3 km, at a maxi-  
mum speed of 80 km/h, to allow the seal-  
ing fluid to seal the tyre well.  
– Turn off the compressor; the switch (2)  
should be in position 0. Detach the air  
hose and unplug the lead. Replace the  
valve’s dust cap.  
WARNING  
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h  
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been  
used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be  
changed as soon as possible (maximum  
driving distance: 200 km).  
07  
– Put the lead (5) and air hose (4) into the  
side compartment (3).  
– Put the puncture repair kit back under the  
floor in the cargo area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Changing the sealing fluid canister  
The canister of sealing fluid should be  
changed before the best-before date has ex-  
pired, see date label (1), or after the tyre has  
been sealed. After use, the canister (6) with  
holder (8) and air hose (10) should be  
changed.  
– Check that the seal (7) on the new canister  
is not damaged. Screw the canister into  
place.  
WARNING  
Ensure the compressor is not connected to  
the 12 V socket when the canister is  
changed.  
– Refit the case (3). Check that the case is  
correctly fitted. Screw it on with the  
screws (2).  
Replacing the canister before the  
– Affix the speed label (4) and new date  
label (1) to the tyre repair kit.  
07  
This replacement can be carried out by an  
authorised Volvo workshop or by following  
the instructions.  
expiration date has been reached  
– Undo the two screws (2) on the orange-  
coloured case (3).  
Treat the removed canister as hazardous  
waste.  
– Remove the speed label (4) and date  
label (1), and open the safety catch (5).  
Loosen the case (3) and take it off.  
IMPORTANT  
Read the safety instructions on the bottom  
of the canister.  
– Unscrew and remove the canister (6).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
 
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Changing the canister and hose after  
use  
– Undo the two screws (2) on the orange-  
coloured case (3).  
– Remove the speed label (4) and date  
label (1), and open the safety catch (5).  
Loosen the case (3) and take it off.  
– Push down the button (8) while turning the  
canister (6) and the holder (9) clockwise.  
Remove them.  
– Pull out the air hose (10).  
– Wipe off remaining sealing fluid with a rag  
or scrape it away if it is has already dried.  
– Fit a new air hose (10). Check that it is  
fitted correctly.  
– Check that the seal (7) on the new canister  
is not damaged. Screw the holder (9) onto  
the canister (6) and turn it anticlockwise  
until a click is heard.  
– Refit the case (3). Check that the case is  
correctly fitted. Screw it on with the  
screws (2).  
– Affix the speed label (4) and new date  
label (1) to the tyre repair kit.  
07  
The empty canister and air hose can be treat-  
ed as normal waste.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
07 Wheels and tyres  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
   
Cleaning ................................................................................................. 168  
Touching up paintwork........................................................................... 171  
Rustproofing .......................................................................................... 172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
CAR CARE  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
Washing the car  
NOTE  
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.  
Use car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead  
to corrosion.  
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog  
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have  
condensation on the inside of the lens. This  
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting  
is designed to withstand this. Condensation  
is normally vented out of the lamp when it  
has been switched on for a time.  
WARNING  
Always test the brakes after washing the car  
to ensure that moisture and corrosion do  
not attack the brake pads and reduce brak-  
ing performance.  
• Do not park the car in direct sunshine.  
Washing a car with hot paintwork can  
cause permanent paintwork damage.  
Wash the car in a car wash with waste  
water separator.  
IMPORTANT  
Removing bird droppings  
• Thoroughly rinse dirt off the underbody of  
the car.  
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork  
than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is  
also more sensitive when it is new. For this  
reason, handwashing is recommended dur-  
ing the first few months with a new car.  
Wash bird droppings off the paintwork as  
soon as possible. Bird droppings contain  
chemicals that affect and discolour paint-  
work very quickly. This discoloration can only  
be removed by a specialist.  
• Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.  
When using a pressure washer: Make sure  
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is  
not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do  
not spray directly at the locks.  
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to  
time if driving for long periods in rain or slush.  
This heats and dries the brake pads. You  
should also do this when you begin driving in  
extremely damp or cold weather.  
Chromed wheels  
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and  
plenty of lukewarm water.  
IMPORTANT  
• If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the  
car using a cold degreasing agent.  
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on  
chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a  
sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke-  
warm water.  
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or  
a water scraper.  
Exterior plastic parts  
A special cleaning agent, available from Vol-  
vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning ex-  
terior plastic parts. Never use strong stain re-  
movers.  
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm  
soap solution or car shampoo.  
Automatic car washes  
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick  
way of washing the car, but it can never re-  
place a proper handwashing. The brushes of  
an automatic car wash cannot reach every-  
where.  
WARNING  
08  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
       
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
Polishing and waxing  
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull  
or to give the paintwork extra protection.  
Cleaning door mirrors with water-  
repellent surface (option)  
Never use products such as car wax, de-  
greaser or similar on mirror surfaces as this  
could ruin their water-repellent properties.  
Cleaning the interior  
Treating stains on fabric upholstery  
A special cleaning agent, available from Vol-  
vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning the  
fabric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair  
the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.  
The car does not need to be polished until it  
is at least one year old. However, the car can  
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or  
wax the car in direct sunlight.  
Take care when cleaning so as not to dam-  
age the glass surface.  
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you  
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt  
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or  
white spirit. More stubborn marks can be re-  
moved using fine rubbing paste designed for  
car paintwork.  
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when re-  
moving ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.  
IMPORTANT  
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the  
fabric upholstery.  
There is natural wear of the water-repellent  
coating.  
Treatment with a special finishing agent  
available from Volvo dealers is recommend-  
ed in order to maintain the water-repellent  
properties. This should be used first after  
three years and then each year.  
Treating stains on leather upholstery  
Volvo’s leather upholstery is equipped with  
surface protection against dirt. Cleaning re-  
protects the leather but grease and dirt dis-  
solves the surface protection. There is a  
comprehensive programme for the care and  
maintenance of leather upholstery. Volvo of-  
fers a leather product for cleaning and treat-  
ing the upholstery by which means the leath-  
er regains its protective layer.  
Polish first with a polish and then wax with  
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on  
the packaging carefully. Many preparations  
contain both polish and wax.  
IMPORTANT  
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,  
protection, lustre sealing or similar could  
damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage  
caused by such treatment is not covered by  
Volvo warranty.  
IMPORTANT  
Never use strong solvents. Such products  
may damage fabric, vinyl and leather uphol-  
stery.  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
         
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
The leather has now been given improved  
protection against stains and a UV filter.  
IMPORTANT  
Note that materials with colour that runs  
when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)  
may discolour the upholstery material.  
Treating stains on interior plastic parts  
and surfaces  
A special cleaning agent, available from Vol-  
vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning in-  
terior plastic parts and surfaces. Do not  
scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain  
removers.  
To achieve best results Volvo recommends  
cleaning and application of the protective  
cream two to four times per year.  
Ask your Volvo dealer about Volvo’s Leather  
Care product  
Cleaning seatbelts  
Washing instructions for leather  
upholstery  
– Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened  
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.  
– Work the dirt away with gentle circular  
movements.  
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-  
cial textile cleaning agent is available from  
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is  
dry before allowing it to retract.  
– Dab the sponge accurately on the stains.  
Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do  
not rub.  
– Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and  
allow the leather to dry completely.  
Protective treatment of leather uphol-  
stery  
– Pour a small amount of the protective  
cream on the felted cloth and massage in  
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular  
movements on the leather.  
08  
– Now allow the leather to dry for  
20 minutes before use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
   
08 Car care  
Touching up paintwork  
If the stone chip has penetrated to the  
bare metal  
– Stick a piece of masking tape over the  
damaged surface. Then remove the tape  
to remove any loose paint.  
Paintwork  
Stone chips and scratches  
Paint is an important part of the car’s rust-  
proofing and should therefore be checked  
regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, dam-  
aged paintwork must be rectified immediate-  
ly. The most common types of paintwork  
damage are stone chips, scratches, and  
marks on the edges of wings and doors.  
– Stir the primer well and apply using a fine  
brush or matchstick. Apply paint using a  
brush once the primer is dry.  
– For scratches, proceed as above, but  
mask around the damaged area to protect  
the undamaged paintwork.  
Colour code  
– After a few days, polish the touched-up  
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount  
of lapping paste.  
Before touching up paintwork, the car must  
be clean and dry and at a temperature above  
15 °C.  
Materials  
• Primer in a can  
Data plate  
• Paint in a can or touch-up pen  
• Brush  
It is important that the correct colour is used.  
The colour code number (1) is shown on the  
data plate, see page 228.  
• Masking tape  
Minor stone chips and scratches  
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the  
bare metal and there is an undamaged colour  
coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the  
damaged area.  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
         
08 Car care  
Rustproofing  
Inspection and maintenance  
Your car received a thorough and complete  
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body  
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The un-  
derbody is protected by a wear-resistant  
anti-corrosion compound. And, a thin, pene-  
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the  
members, cavities and closed sections.  
Maintain the car’s rustproofing.  
• Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-  
body. If using a pressure washer, keep the  
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted  
surfaces.  
• Regularly check and touch-up the rust-  
proofing treatment as necessary.  
The car’s rustproofing does not normally re-  
quire treatment for approximately 12 years.  
After that time, it should be treated at three-  
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-  
ment, please contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
     
08 Car care  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
   
Volvo service .......................................................................................... 176  
Self-maintenance................................................................................... 177  
Bonnet and engine compartment .......................................................... 178  
Diesel ..................................................................................................... 179  
Oils and fluids ........................................................................................ 180  
Wiper blades .......................................................................................... 185  
Battery................................................................................................... 186  
Replacing bulbs ..................................................................................... 188  
Fuses...................................................................................................... 194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE  
09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Volvo service  
Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-  
mation without consent. However, Volvo Car  
Corporation may be forced to disclose the in-  
formation due to national legislation. Volvo  
Car Corporation and authorised Volvo work-  
shops may also read and use the informa-  
tion.  
Volvo service programme  
Installing accessories  
The incorrect connection and installation of  
accessories can negatively affect the car’s  
electrical system. Certain accessories only  
function when the appropriate software has  
been programmed into the car’s electrical  
system. Always contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop before installing accessories  
which are connected to or affect the electri-  
cal system.  
Before the car left the factory, it was thor-  
oughly test driven. It was checked again in  
accordance with Volvo Car Corporation reg-  
ulations before it was handed over to you.  
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as  
possible, follow the Volvo service pro-  
gramme specified in the Service and Warran-  
ty Booklet. Have an authorised Volvo work-  
shop carry out service and maintenance  
work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,  
special tools and service literature to guaran-  
tee the highest quality of service.  
Adverse driving conditions  
Check the oil level more frequently for long  
journeys:  
Recording vehicle data  
• Towing a caravan or trailer  
• In mountainous regions  
• At high speeds  
One or more of the computers in your Volvo  
are capable of recording detailed informa-  
tion. This information is intended for use in  
research to enhance safety and for diagnos-  
ing faults in some of the in-car systems. The  
data may include details regarding seatbelt  
use by the driver and passengers, the func-  
tions of various vehicle systems and mod-  
ules, and status information about the en-  
gine, throttle, steering, brakes and other sys-  
tems. This data can also include details of  
the way the car is driven. This type of infor-  
mation can include, without being limited to,  
specific details such as vehicle speed, the  
use of the brake and accelerator pedals and  
steering wheel position. This latter type of  
data can be stored for a limited period while  
the car is being driven and subsequently dur-  
ing a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car  
• In temperatures colder than –30 °C or  
hotter than +40 °C.  
IMPORTANT  
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and  
follow the instructions in the Service and  
Warranty Booklet.  
Also check the oil level more often if the car  
is often driven short distances (less than  
10 km) when temperatures are low (below  
+5 °C).  
Special service measures  
This can produce abnormally high oil temper-  
ature or oil consumption.  
Certain service measures, which affect the  
car’s electrical system, can only be per-  
formed using electronic equipment specially  
developed for your car. Always contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop before beginning  
or performing service work that affects the  
electrical system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
         
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Self-maintenance  
Before starting work on the car  
Check regularly  
Check the following at regular intervals, for  
example, when refuelling:  
Battery  
• Check that the battery cables are correctly  
• Coolant â€“ The level must be between the  
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion  
tank.  
connected and tightened.  
• Never disconnect the battery when the  
engine is running (e.g. if replacing the  
battery).  
• Engine oil – The level must be between the  
MIN and MAX marks.  
• Never use a quick charger to charge the  
battery. The battery cables must be dis-  
connected when charging the battery.  
• Power steering fluid – The level must be  
between the MIN and MAX marks.  
• Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well  
filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera-  
tures around freezing.  
The battery contains acid that is both corro-  
sive and toxic. Handle the battery in an envi-  
ronmentally-suitable way. Let your Volvo  
dealer assist you.  
• Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be  
between the MIN and MAX marks.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
High voltage output from the ignition sys-  
tem. The voltage in the ignition system is  
dangerous. The ignition must therefore al-  
ways be switched off for work in the engine  
compartment.  
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition  
coils when the ignition is on or the engine is  
hot.  
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start  
automatically some time after the engine  
has been switched off.  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
       
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Bonnet and engine compartment  
Opening the bonnet  
1
– Pull the handle on the far left under the  
dashboard. You will hear when the catch  
releases.  
9. Filler opening for engine oil  
Engine compartment  
1. Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)  
2. Coolant expansion tank  
10.Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-  
hand drive)  
– Insert your hand under the centre of the  
front edge of the bonnet and press the  
safety catch to the right.  
11.Battery  
3. Reservoir for the power steering fluid  
(concealed behind the headlamp)  
12.Relay and fuse box  
1
1
13.Air filter  
4. Engine oil dipstick  
– Open the bonnet.  
5. Radiator  
WARNING  
6. Radiator fan  
7. Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)  
Check that the bonnet locks properly when  
closed.  
8. Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-  
hand drive)  
1
Dependent on engine variant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
       
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Diesel  
Fuel system  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204  
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to  
contaminants, such as high volumes of sul-  
phur particles for example. Only use diesel  
fuel from a well-known producers. Never use  
diesel of dubious quality.  
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:  
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel  
Certain special additives remove the water  
separation in the fuel filter.  
oil, RME (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable  
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements  
in accordance with Volvo recommendations  
and generate increased wear and engine  
damage that is not covered by the Volvo  
warranty.  
At low temperatures (–40 °C to –6 °C), a par-  
affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,  
which can lead to ignition problems. Special  
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures  
around freezing point is available from the  
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous  
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of  
paraffin precipitate.  
IMPORTANT  
For model year 2006 or later the sulphur  
content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.  
Empty tank  
No special procedures are required if the  
tank runs dry. The fuel system is bled auto-  
matically if the ignition switch is kept in  
position II for approx. 60 seconds before the  
start attempt.  
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is re-  
duced if the tank is kept well filled. When re-  
fuelling, check that the area around the fuel  
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the  
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-  
gent and water.  
Draining condensation from the fuel  
filter  
The fuel filter separates condensation from  
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine  
operation.  
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals  
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-  
let or if you suspect that the car has been  
filled with contaminated fuel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
       
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Volvo recommends  
oil products.  
Engine compartment decal for oil  
grade  
Checking the engine oil and oil filter  
Change the oil and oil filter in accordance  
with the intervals specified in the Service and  
Warranty Booklet.  
IMPORTANT  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact.  
An approved engine oil must be used in  
order that the recommended service inter-  
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed  
grade of oil (see the engine compartment  
decal) for both filling and oil change, other-  
wise you will risk affecting service life, start-  
ing characteristics, fuel consumption and  
environmental impact.  
Dipstick, petrol engines  
IMPORTANT  
Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see  
the engine compartment decal. Check the  
oil level frequently and change the oil regu-  
larly. The engine will be damaged if lower  
grade oil is used or if the car is driven with  
the oil level too low.  
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran-  
ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed  
grade and viscosity is not used.  
Volvo uses different systems for warning of  
low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain vari-  
ants have an oil pressure sensor, and then  
the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other vari-  
ants have an oil level sensor, and then the  
driver is informed via the warning symbol in  
the centre of the instrument unit as well as by  
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is  
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-  
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a  
higher grade than that specified on the decal.  
See page 232.  
Dipstick, diesel engines.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
         
09  
Oils and fluids  
display texts. Certain models have both vari-  
ants. Contact an authorised Volvo dealer for  
more information.  
Checking the oil in a warm engine:  
– Park the car on a level surface, switch off  
the engine and wait 10 – 15 minutes to  
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.  
Checking the oil  
Checking the oil level in a new car is espe-  
cially important before the first scheduled oil  
change. The Service and Warranty Booklet  
specifies the odometer readings for oil  
changes.  
– Wipe the dipstick clean before checking  
the level.  
– Check the oil level using the dipstick. The  
oil level must be between the MIN and  
MAX marks.  
Volvo recommends checking the oil level  
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure-  
ments are made on a cold engine before  
starting. The measurement will be inaccurate  
if taken immediately after the engine is  
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that  
the level is too low because the oil has not  
had time to flow down into the oil sump.  
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by  
topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until  
the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN  
mark on the dipstick. See page 232 – 233 for  
capacities.  
WARNING  
The oil level must be within the area marked on  
the dipstick.  
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-  
fold due to the risk of fire.  
Checking the oil in a cold engine:  
– Wipe the dipstick clean before checking  
the level.  
IMPORTANT  
– Check the oil level using the dipstick. The  
oil level must be between the MIN and  
MAX marks.  
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-  
sumption may increase if too much oil is  
poured into the engine.  
– If the level is close to the MIN mark, start  
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up  
until the oil level is nearer the MAX than  
the MIN mark on the dipstick. See  
page 232 – 233 for capacities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
 
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Washer fluid, topping up  
Checking and topping up the coolant  
NOTE  
Mix the washer antifreeze and water before  
filling the reservoir.  
1
Location of washer fluid reservoir .  
When topping up the coolant, follow the in-  
structions on the packaging. It is important  
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and  
water is correct for the prevailing weather  
conditions. Never top up with water only. The  
risk of freezing increases with both too little  
and too much coolant concentrate.  
The windscreen and headlamp washers  
share a common reservoir.  
– Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.  
– Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.  
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so  
that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,  
reservoir and hoses. See the capacities on  
page 236.  
IMPORTANT  
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion  
agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars  
are filled with coolant that can withstand  
temperatures down to approximately  
–35 °C.  
1
Dependent on engine variant.  
For capacities, see page 236.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
   
09  
Oils and fluids  
braking, such as driving in mountains or trop-  
ical climates with high humidity.  
Check the coolant regularly  
Checking and topping up the brake  
and clutch fluid  
The level should lie between the MIN and  
MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the  
system is not filled sufficiently, high local  
temperatures could occur, causing a risk of  
damage (cracks) in the cylinder head. Top up  
the coolant when the level falls to the MIN  
mark.  
WARNING  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in  
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further  
before topping up the brake fluid.  
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must  
be investigated.  
WARNING  
The coolant may be very hot. If the coolant  
requires topping up when the engine is at  
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-  
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the  
overpressure.  
NOTE  
The brake and clutch fluid have a common  
reservoir . The fluid level must be between  
the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level  
regularly. Change the brake fluid every other  
year or at every other regular service.  
1
The engine must only be run with a well-  
filled cooling system. High temperatures  
can occur, causing a risk of damage  
(cracks) to the cylinder head.  
See the capacities and recommended fluid  
grade on page 235.  
The fluid should be changed annually on cars  
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent  
1
Location dependent on whether car is left or  
right-hand drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Checking and topping up the power  
steering fluid  
NOTE  
Check the level frequently.  
The fluid does not require changing. For ca-  
pacities and recommended fluid grade, see  
page 235.  
If a fault should arise in the power steering  
system or if the car is without power and  
must be towed, it can still be steered. How-  
ever the steering will be much heavier than  
normal and it will require more effort to turn  
the wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
 
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Wiper blades  
Changing the wiper blades  
NOTE  
The wiper blades are different lengths. The  
blade on the driver’s side is longer than the  
blade on the passenger side.  
– Turn up the wiper arm.  
– Press the button located on the wiper  
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),  
parallel with the wiper arm.  
– Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a  
"click" is heard.  
– Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed.  
– Fold down the wiper arm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
     
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Battery  
Battery care  
WARNING  
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. A spark, which  
can be generated if you connect the jump  
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the  
battery explode. The battery also contains  
sulphuric acid, which can cause serious  
burns. If the acid comes into contact with  
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quan-  
tities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes,  
seek medical advice immediately.  
NOTE  
The life of the battery is shortened if it be-  
comes discharged repeatedly  
There may be two different types of battery.  
They are fully interchangeable with each other.  
For the battery to function satisfactorily:  
• Regularly check that the electrolyte level is  
correct (A) and never fill above the level  
mark.  
The service life and function of the battery is  
influenced by factors such as the number of  
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-  
ditions and climatic conditions.  
• Check all cells. Use a screwdriver to re-  
move the cell caps (or the cover).  
• If necessary, top up with distilled water to  
the battery’s maximum mark.  
IMPORTANT  
Always use distilled or deionised water (bat-  
tery water).  
• Fit the cell caps (or the cover) firmly.  
NOTE  
An expended battery must be recycled in an  
environmentally responsible manner as it  
contains lead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
     
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Battery  
Risk of explosion.  
Symbols on the battery  
Use protective goggles  
Changing the battery  
Removing the battery  
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key.  
– Wait at least 5 minutes before touching  
any electrical terminals. This allows time  
for the information in the car’s electrical  
system to be stored in the various control  
modules.  
Further information in the  
owner’s manual.  
– Remove the cover.  
– Disconnect the negative battery lead.  
– Disconnect the positive battery lead.  
Store the battery out of the  
reach of children.  
– Undo the front wall of the battery box  
using a screwdriver.  
– Release the clamp securing the battery.  
– Remove the battery.  
The battery contains corro-  
sive acid.  
Fitting the battery  
– Fit the battery into position.  
– Fit the clamp securing the battery.  
– Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.  
– Connect the positive lead.  
Avoid sparks and naked  
flames.  
– Connect the negative lead.  
– Refit the cover over the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
General  
Changing front bulbs  
All bulb specifications are given on page 243.  
The following list contains bulbs and point-  
source lamps that are specialised or unsuita-  
ble for changing except at a workshop:  
• General interior lighting in the roof  
• Reading lamps and glovebox lighting  
• Indicator, door mirror and approach light-  
ing  
• High-level brake light  
• Bi-Xenon headlamp  
– Unplug the connector by pressing down  
the clip with a thumb (3) while moving out  
the connector (4) with the other hand.  
WARNING  
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps, Xenon  
lamp replacement must be carried out by an  
authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps  
must be handled with extreme care due to  
the high-voltage unit in the Xenon lamp.  
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are  
changed by first removing the lamp housing  
from the engine compartment.  
– Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a  
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.  
Removing the lamp housing:  
– Remove the ignition key and turn the light  
switch to position 0.  
Fitting the lamp housing:  
– Plug in the connector and refit the lamp  
housing and locking pin. Check that the  
pin is correctly inserted.  
IMPORTANT  
– Withdraw the lamp housing’s locking  
pin (1).  
Never touch the bulbs’ glass with your fin-  
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers are  
vaporised by the heat, coating and damag-  
ing the reflector.  
– Check the lighting.  
– Pull the lamp housing to the side and then  
forward (2) .  
The lamp housing must be plugged in and  
secured in place before the lighting is turned  
on or the ignition key inserted into the ignition  
switch.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the  
connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
       
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Main beam  
Dipped beam  
– Remove the entire lamp housing.  
Removing the cover and bulb:  
– Remove the entire lamp housing.  
Fitting a new bulb  
– Fit the new bulb. It can only be fitted in  
one position.  
– Left-hand headlamp:  
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.  
Right-hand headlamp:  
– Bend aside the catches and remove the  
cover.  
– Press the spring clip up and then slightly  
to the right so that it clicks into place.  
Turn the bulb holder clockwise.  
– Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
– Withdraw the bulb holder and change the  
bulb.  
– Press the connector back on.  
– Refit the plastic cover.  
– Release the spring clip that secures the  
bulb. First, press it to the left to release it,  
then out and down.  
– Refit the bulb holder. It can only be fitted  
in one way.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
– Pull out the bulb.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Position/parking lamps  
Direction indicators  
Side marker lamps  
– Pull out the bulb holder with a pair of  
pliers. Do not pull out the bulb holder by  
pulling the electrical cable.  
– Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and  
remove it.  
– Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and  
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.  
– To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,  
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.  
– Refit the bulb holder. It can only be fitted  
in one way.  
– Replace the bulb.  
– Press the bulb holder back into place. It  
can only be fitted in one way.  
– Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into  
the lamp housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
     
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
– Press the bulb holder into place and refit  
the cover.  
Fog lamps  
Removing the bulb holder  
NOTE  
If the error message BULB FAILURE/  
CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty  
bulb has been replaced then consult an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop.  
– Switch off all lights and turn the ignition  
key to position 0.  
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be re-  
placed from inside the cargo area.  
– Remove the panel from around the lamp  
housing.  
– Switch off all lights and turn the ignition  
key to position 0.  
– Remove the two Torx screws securing the  
lamp housing and take out the lamp hous-  
ing.  
– Remove the covers in the left/right-hand  
panel to access the bulbs.  
– These bulbs are located in separate bulb  
holders.  
– Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
– Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.  
– Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.  
– Plug in the connector to the bulb.  
– Unplug the connector from the bulb hold-  
er.  
– Squeeze together the catches and remove  
the bulb holder.  
– Secure the lamp housing with the screws  
and press the panel back into place.  
– Replace the bulb.  
– Plug in the connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Location of the bulbs in the rear lamp  
cluster  
Number plate lighting  
Courtesy lighting  
– Switch off all lights and turn the ignition  
key to position 0.  
There is courtesy lighting under the dash-  
board on the driver and passenger sides.  
Bulb holder  
1. Brake light  
– Remove the screw with a screwdriver.  
– Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lens detaches.  
2. Position/parking lamps  
3. Direction indicators  
4. Rear fog lamp (one side)  
5. Reversing lamp  
– Carefully detach the entire lamp housing  
and withdraw it. Turn the connector anti-  
clockwise and pull out the bulb.  
– Remove the blown bulb.  
– Fit a new bulb.  
– Replace the bulb.  
– Refit the lens.  
– Insert the connector and turn clockwise.  
– Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it  
into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
     
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Fitting the mirror glass:  
– First, press the three lugs at top edge of  
mirror glass back into position.  
Cargo area  
Vanity mirror lighting  
– Then press the three lower lugs back into  
position.  
– Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lamp housing comes loose.  
Removing the mirror glass:  
– Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower  
edge, in the centre. Carefully prise up the  
lug on the edge.  
– Remove the blown bulb.  
– Fit a new bulb.  
– Insert the screwdriver under the edge on  
both the left and right side (at the black  
rubber points) and carefully prise so that  
the lens releases at the lower edge.  
– Carefully detach and lift aside the entire  
mirror glass and cover.  
– Remove the blown bulb and replace it with  
a new one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
General  
All electrical functions and components are  
fused to protect the car’s electrical system  
from damage by short circuiting and over-  
loading.  
The fuses are in two different locations in the  
car:  
• Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart-  
ment  
• Relay/fuse box in the passenger compart-  
ment.  
Changing  
If an electrical component or function does  
not work, it may be because the compo-  
nent’s fuse was temporarily overloaded and  
blew.  
– Look in the fuse diagram to locate the  
fuse.  
– Pull out the fuse and check from the side  
to see whether the curved wire has blown.  
– If this is the case, replace it with a new  
fuse of the same colour and amperage.  
Each fuse box has space for several spare  
fuses. If the same fuse blows repeatedly it  
means that there is a fault in the component.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the system checked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
       
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
Relay/fuse box in the engine  
compartment  
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure  
to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of  
the same colour and amperage.  
• 19–36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.  
• Fuses 7–18 are of the "JCASE" type and  
should be replaced by an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
• Fuses 1–6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and  
may only be replaced by an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
On the inside of the cover are tweezers to as-  
sist removing and fitting fuses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
   
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
1. Radiator fan .............................................................................. 50 A  
2. Power steering ..................................................................80 A  
3. Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ......................60 A  
4. Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ......................60 A  
5. Climate control element, additional heater PTC (option)..... 80 A  
13.Starter motor relay ............................................................ 30 A  
14.Trailer wiring ..................................................................... 40 A  
15.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
16.Supply to infotainment system .......................................... 30 A  
17.Windscreen wipers............................................................ 30 A  
18.Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ..................... 40 A  
19.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
20.Horn ................................................................................. 15 A  
6. Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel)...................................................60 A  
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel)...................................................70 A  
7. ABS pump ......................................................................... 30 A  
8. ABS valves ........................................................................20 A  
9. Engine functions................................................................30 A  
10.Ventilation fan....................................................................40 A  
11.Headlamp washers ............................................................ 20 A  
12.Supply to heated rear window ...........................................30 A  
21.Fuel-driven additional heater, passenger  
compartment heater ......................................................... 20 A  
22.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
23.Engine control module ECM (5-cyl. petrol)  
transmission (TCM) ........................................................... 10 A  
24.Heated fuel filter, PTC element oil trap (5-cyl. diesel)......... 20 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
 
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
25.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
26.Ignition switch ...................................................................15 A  
27.A/C compressor ................................................................10 A  
28.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
29.Front fog lamp ...................................................................15 A  
30.Engine control module ECM (1.6 l petrol, 2.0 l diesel)...........3 A  
31.Voltage regulator, alternator 4-cyl......................................10 A  
32.Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), lambda-sond (4-cyl. petrol),  
charge air cooler (4-cyl. diesel), mass air flow sensor  
and turbo control (5-cyl. diesel) .........................................10 A  
33.Lambda-sond and vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol),  
engine control module (5-cyl. diesel), diesel filter  
heater (4-cyl. diesel) ..........................................................20 A  
34.Ignition coils (petrol), injectors (1.6 l petrol), fuel pump  
(4-cyl. diesel), pressure switch, climate control (5-cyl.),  
glow plugs and EGR emission control (5-cyl. diesel) ..........10 A  
35.Engine sensors for valves, relay coil, air conditioning PTC  
element, oil trap (5-cyl. petrol), engine control module  
ECM (5-cyl. diesel), canister (petrol), injectors (1.8/2.0 l petrol,  
MAF mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol, 4-cyl. diesel),  
turbo control (4-cyl. diesel), pressure switch power  
steering (1.6 l petrol), EGR emission control  
(4-cyl. diesel) ..................................................................... 15 A  
36.Engine control module ECM (not 5-cyl. diesel), accelerator  
pedal position sensor, lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) ............10 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
Relay/fuse box in the passenger  
compartment  
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fus-  
es are located under the glovebox. The box  
also provides space for several spare fuses.  
Tools for fuse replacement are located in the  
relay/fuse box in the engine compartment,  
see page 195.  
– Turn the two wing screws (that secure the  
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise so that they  
detach.  
– Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it  
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it  
completely. The fuse box can be fully  
unhooked.  
Changing fuses  
– Close the fuse box in the reverse order.  
– Remove the trim concealing the fuse box  
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the  
clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-  
ing the clips.  
– Remove the pins from the centre of the  
clips. Fit the trim and the clips, and rein-  
sert the loose pins into the clips, this  
expands the clips and secures the trim.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
 
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
37.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
38.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
39.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
40.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
41.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
42.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
43.Phone, audio system, RTI (option) .....................................15 A  
44.SRS system.......................................................................10 A  
45.Electrical socket ................................................................15 A  
46.Passenger compartment, glovebox and courtesy lighting ....5 A  
47.Interior lighting ....................................................................5 A  
48.Washer ..............................................................................15 A  
49.SRS system ...................................................................... 10 A  
50.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
51.Parking assistance, additional heater for the passenger  
compartment, Bi-Xenon (option) ....................................... 10 A  
52.Transmission control module (TCM), ABS system ............... 5 A  
53.Power steering.................................................................. 10 A  
54.Engine control module ECM (5-cyl.) .................................. 10 A  
55.Remote control module, Keyless control module............... 20 A  
56.Siren control module......................................................... 10 A  
57.Data link connector (DLC), brake light switch .................... 15 A  
58.Main beam (right), auxiliary lamps relay coil ..................... 7,5 A  
59.Main beam, left ................................................................ 7,5 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
 
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
60.Seat heating (driver’s side).................................................15 A  
61.Seat heating (passenger side) ............................................15 A  
62.Sunroof ............................................................................ 20 A  
63.Supply to rear right door.................................................... 20 A  
64.Audio system, RTI (option)...................................................5 A  
65.Infotainment system ............................................................5 A  
66.Infotainment control module (ICM), climate control ............10 A  
67.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
68.Cruise control......................................................................5 A  
69.Climate control, rain sensor .................................................5 A  
70.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
71.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
72.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
84.Power passenger seat....................................................... 25 A  
85.Power driver’s seat ........................................................... 25 A  
86.Interior lighting, cargo area lighting, power seats,  
fuel level display (1.8F)........................................................ 5 A  
73.Sunroof, overhead console (OHC) rear seatbelt reminder,  
autodim mirror.....................................................................5 A  
74.Fuel pump relay .................................................................15 A  
75.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
76.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
77.Electrical socket in cargo area, accessory electronic  
module (AEM) ....................................................................15 A  
78.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
79.Reversing lamp....................................................................5 A  
80.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
81.Supply to rear left door ......................................................20 A  
82.Supply to front right door...................................................25 A  
83.Supply to front left door.....................................................25 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
   
General................................................................................................... 204  
Audio functions ...................................................................................... 205  
Radio functions...................................................................................... 207  
CD functions .......................................................................................... 211  
Menu structure – audio system.............................................................. 213  
Phone functions (option)........................................................................ 214  
Menu structure – phone......................................................................... 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Infotainment system  
General  
to be active until the key is removed from the  
ignition switch. The audio system is then  
started automatically the next time the key is  
turned to position I.  
Infotainment system  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the  
two stereo audio channels to left, centre,  
right and rear speakers. This provides a more  
realistic sound quality than that provided by  
standard two-channel stereo.  
2
10  
Menus  
Some infotainment system functions are  
controlled via a menu system. The current  
menu level is shown at the top right of the  
display. Menu options are shown in the mid-  
dle of the display.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and  
the Dolby icon are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-  
poration. The Dolby Surround  
Pro Logic II System is manufactured under li-  
cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing  
Corporation.  
• MENU (4) leads to the menu system.  
• Up/down with the navigation button (5)  
moves between menu options.  
• ENTER (7) selects or activates/deacti-  
vates a menu option.  
Infotainment is a system that integrates the  
audio system and the phone . The infotain-  
ment system can be easily operated using  
1
• EXIT (6) goes back one step in the menu  
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit  
the menu system.  
the control panel or the steering wheel key-  
1
pad , see page 55. The display (2) shows  
Shortcuts  
Menu options are numbered and can also be  
selected directly with the keypad (3).  
messages and information on the current  
function.  
Audio system  
Equipment  
The audio system can be equipped with dif-  
ferent options and different versions. There  
are three audio system versions: Perform-  
ance, High Performance and Premium  
Sound. FM and AM radio with RDS and CD  
player is however included in each version.  
On/Off  
POWER (1) switches the audio system on or  
off. If the audio system is active when the ig-  
nition key is turned to position 0 it continues  
1
2
Option.  
Premium Sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
           
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
Sometimes the AUX external audio source  
can be heard at a different volume to the in-  
ternal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If  
the audio volume of the external audio  
source is too high then the sound quality can  
be impaired. Prevent this by adjusting the in-  
put volume of the AUX input.  
Audio controls  
Audio source selection  
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches be-  
tween FM1, FM2 and AM. Repeatedly press-  
ing MODE switches between CD and AUX.  
10  
1
AUX  
The AUX input can be used for connecting an  
MP3 player for example.  
– Set the audio system in AUX mode using  
MODE.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to AUX input Volume and press  
ENTER.  
– Turn TUNING or press right/left on the  
navigation button.  
Audio settings  
1. VOLUME – Knob  
Adjusting audio settings  
2. AM/FM – Audio source selection  
Repeatedly pressing SOUND browses be-  
tween the following alternatives. Adjust by  
turning TUNING.  
3. MODE – Audio source selection,  
CD/AUX  
4. TUNING – Knob  
• BASS – Bass level.  
• TREBLE – Treble level.  
5. SOUND – Button  
Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm  
• FADER – Balance between the front and  
Volume  
NOTE  
rear speakers.  
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel key-  
pad to regulate the volume, see page 55. Au-  
dio volume adjusts automatically depending  
on vehicle speed, see page 206.  
The sound quality may be impaired if the  
player is charged while the audio system is  
in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.  
• BALANCE – Balance between the left and  
right-hand speakers.  
2
• SUBWOOFER – Bass speaker level. The  
subwoofer must be activated before ad-  
justment is possible. See page 206.  
1
High Performance and Premium Sound.  
2Option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
         
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
1
• CENTRE – Centre speaker level. Three  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
car increases. There are three levels to  
choose from : Low, Medium and High.  
4
channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be  
activated before adjustment is possible.  
See page 206.  
ENTER.  
10  
– Scroll to Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and  
Adjusting automatic volume control  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
1
2
• SURROUND – Surround sound level.  
Pro Logic II must be activated before  
adjustment is possible. See page 206.  
– Scroll to Pro Logic II , 3 channel or Off  
and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
ENTER.  
Equalizer front/rear  
3
– Scroll to Automatic volume control and  
press ENTER.  
The equalizer can be used to adjust different  
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
frequency bands separately.  
– Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press  
ENTER.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
Adjusting equalizer  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
ENTER.  
– Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
ENTER.  
Surround  
1
Surround settings govern the spa-  
– Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer rear  
and press ENTER.  
tial perception of the sound. Set-  
tings and activating/deactivating  
are separate for each audio source.  
The graphic on the display indicates the au-  
dio level of the frequency in question.  
The Dolby icon in the display indicates that  
Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three  
different settings for surround sound:  
– Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/  
down on the navigation button. Additional  
frequencies can be selected using left/  
right on the navigation button.  
• Pro Logic II  
– Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.  
• 3 channel  
Automatic volume control  
• Off – 2-channel stereo.  
The auto volume control function allows the  
audio volume to increase as the speed of the  
Activating/deactivating surround sound  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
2
Not available in AM and FM mode.  
1
3
4
Premium Sound.  
Certain audio systems.  
Not Performance Sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
           
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
Manual tuning  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
– Adjust the frequency by turning  
TUNING (3).  
Automatic storage of stations  
Radio controls  
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio  
stations and stores them automatically in a  
separate memory. The function is especially  
useful in areas where one is unfamiliar with  
the radio stations and their frequencies.  
10  
Tune into a station with a long press (left or  
right) on the navigation button or by using the  
steering wheel keypad:  
Starting automatic storage of stations  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
– Hold the right or left side of the navigation  
button depressed until the desired fre-  
quency appears in the display.  
– Hold AUTO (7) depressed until Autostor-  
ing... appears in the display.  
As long as the frequency graphic appears in  
the display, searching can be resumed by  
briefly pressing the navigation button (left or  
right) (5)  
Once Autostoring... disappears from the dis-  
play, the stations are stored. The radio con-  
tinues in Auto mode and Auto appears in the  
display. The automatically stored stations  
can now be selected using the station preset  
buttons (2).  
Storing stations  
1. FM/AM – Wavelength selection  
2. Station presets  
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-  
length. FM has two memories for presets:  
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected  
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering  
wheel keypad.  
Cancelling automatic storage of sta-  
tions  
– Press EXIT (6).  
3. TUNING – Knob for station searches  
4. SCAN – Scanning  
5. Navigation button – Tuning and menus  
6. EXIT – Cancel current function  
7. AUTO – Automatic storage of stations  
Tuning  
Selecting an auto-stored preset  
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode  
provides access to the autostored presets.  
Storing stations manually  
– Tune into a station.  
– Hold a station preset button depressed  
until the message Station stored appears  
in the display.  
– Briefly press AUTO (7).  
Auto appears in the display.  
Automatic tuning  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
– Give a brief press, left or right, on the  
navigation button (5).  
– Press a preset button (2).  
The radio remains in Auto mode until it is ex-  
ited by a brief press on AUTO (7), EXIT (6) or  
AM/FM (1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
           
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
– Press a preset button and hold it de-  
pressed until the message Station stored  
appears in the display.  
The programme functions alarm (ALARM),  
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and  
programme types (PTY) interrupt one anoth-  
er in order of priority, where alarm has the  
highest priority and programme types has  
the lowest. For further programme interrup-  
tion settings, see EON and REG on  
Storing autostored presets in another  
memory  
An autostored preset can be transferred to  
the FM or AM memory.  
10  
Scan is interrupted and the stored station  
can be selected as a preset.  
– Briefly press AUTO (7).  
RDS functions  
Auto appears in the display.  
Radio Data System – RDS links FM transmit-  
ters into a network. An FM transmitter in such  
a network sends information that gives an  
RDS radio the following functions:  
page 210. The programme functions are  
modified via the menu system, see page 204.  
– Press a preset button.  
– Press the button under which the station  
will be stored and hold it depressed until  
the message Station stored appears in  
the display.  
Returning to the interrupted audio  
source  
Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio  
source.  
• Automatically switches to a stronger  
transmitter if reception in the area is poor.  
The radio exits Auto mode and the stored  
station can be selected as a preset.  
• Searches for programme form, such as  
traffic information or news.  
Scanning  
Alarm  
• Receives text information on current radio  
programme.  
SCAN (4) automatically searches for strong  
AM or FM stations. When a station is found, it  
is played for approx. eight seconds before  
scanning is resumed.  
This function is used to warn of serious acci-  
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot  
be temporarily interrupted or deactivated.  
The message ALARM! appears on the dis-  
play when an alarm message is transmitted.  
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only  
some if its functionality.  
Programme functions  
Activating/deactivating Scan  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM.  
– Press SCAN to activate.  
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations  
with certain programme types. If a desired  
programme type is found, the radio can  
switch stations, interrupting the audio source  
currently in use. For example, if the CD player  
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-  
mission is played at a preset volume; see  
page 210. The radio returns to the previous  
audio source and volume when the set pro-  
gramme type is no longer broadcast.  
Traffic information – TP  
This function allows traffic informa-  
tion sent within a set station’s RDS  
network to break through. TP indi-  
cates that the function is activated.  
If the set station can send traffic information  
SCAN appears in the display. Cancel with  
SCAN or EXIT.  
Storing a station  
A desired station can be stored as a preset  
while Scan is active.  
then  
appears on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
       
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
transmitted within a set station’s RDS net-  
work to break through.  
Activating/deactivating TP  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
News  
This function allows news broad-  
casts within a set station’s RDS  
network to break through. The mes-  
sage NEWS indicates that the func-  
10  
Activating/deactivating PTY  
– Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER.  
TP from current station/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with traffic informa-  
tion from only the set (current) station or from  
all stations.  
tion is active.  
Activating/deactivating News  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to News and press ENTER.  
– Select an FM station.  
A list of programme types appears: Current  
affairs, Information etc. The PTY function is  
activated by selecting programme types and  
deactivated by clearing all PTYs.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
News from current station/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with news from only  
the set (current) station or from all stations.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
– Select the desired programme types or  
Clear all PTY  
– Select an FM station.  
– Scroll to TP Station and press ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Either TP from current station or  
TP from all stations will appear in the dis-  
play.  
Search PTY  
This function searches the entire wavelength  
for the selected programme type.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
– Scroll to News station and press ENTER.  
– Press ENTER.  
– Activate PTY.  
Either News from current station or  
News from all stations will appear in the dis-  
play.  
Activating/deactivating TP search  
TP search is useful during long journeys  
while an audio source other than the radio is  
being played. The function automatically  
searches for traffic information within differ-  
ent RDS networks.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.  
– Press ENTER.  
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-  
gramme types, >| To seek appears in the  
display. Press the navigation button to the  
right to continue searching for another  
broadcast of the selected programme types.  
Programme types – PTY  
The PTY function can be used to  
select different programme types,  
such as Pop music and  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Serious classic. The  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
PTY symbol indicates that the function is ac-  
tive. The function allows programme types  
– Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
   
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
1
• Distant – interrupts if the station trans-  
Activating/deactivating AF  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Display of programme type  
The programme type of the current station  
can be shown on the display.  
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of  
static.  
10  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
• Off – no interruption for programmes from  
other transmitters.  
NOTE  
– Scroll to AF and press ENTER.  
Regional radio programmes – REG  
Not all radio stations support this function.  
Activating/deactivating EON  
This function causes the radio to  
continue with a regional transmitter  
even if its signal strength is low.  
REG indicates that the function is  
active. The regional function is normally de-  
activated.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating display  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to EON and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.  
Radio text  
Some RDS stations transmit information on  
programme content, artists, etc. This infor-  
mation can be shown in the display.  
– Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press  
ENTER.  
Resetting RDS functions  
Resets all radio settings to the original facto-  
ry settings.  
Activating/deactivating REG  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating radio text  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Enhanced Other Networks – EON  
– Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.  
The EON function is particularly useful in ur-  
ban areas with many regional radio stations.  
It allows the distance between the car and  
the radio station transmitter determine when  
programme functions should interrupt the  
current audio source.  
Automatic frequency update – AF  
Volume control, programme types  
The AF function selects one of the strongest  
transmitters for a set station. The radio may  
sometimes need to search through the entire  
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If  
this occurs, the radio mutes and PI  
The interrupting programme form is heard at  
the volume selected for such. If the volume  
level is adjusted during the programme inter-  
ruption, the new level is saved until the next  
programme interruption.  
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station  
transmitter is close.  
seek Exit to cancel appears on the display.  
1
Default/Factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
               
10 Infotainment system  
CD functions  
Starting playback (CD changer)  
If a CD position with a music CD is already  
selected when the audio system is activated  
then playback starts automatically. Other-  
wise change to CD changer mode using  
MODE and select a disc with the number  
buttons 1 –6 or Up/Down on the navigation  
button.  
Pause  
CD function controls  
If the volume is turned down completely, the  
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted  
when volume is increased.  
10  
1
Audio files  
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA  
format audio files.  
Inserting a CD (CD changer)  
– Select an empty position with buttons 1–6  
or Up/Down on the navigation button.  
NOTE  
Certain types of copy-protected audio files  
cannot be read by the player.  
An empty position is marked on the display.  
The text Insert disc shows that a new disc  
can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up  
to six CDs.  
When a CD containing audio files is inserted  
into the player the disc’s directory structure  
is read in. It may take a while before playback  
starts depending on the quality of the disc.  
1. Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,  
track selection and menus  
– Insert a CD in the slot of the CD changer.  
CD eject  
1
Navigation and playback  
2. CD changer position selection  
A CD will stay in the ejected position for ap-  
prox. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-in-  
serted into the player and playback contin-  
ues.  
If a disc containing audio files is inside the  
CD player then ENTER leads to the disc’s di-  
rectory structure. The directory structure is  
navigated in the same way as the audio sys-  
tem’s menu structure. Audio files have the  
3. CD insertion/eject  
4. CD insertion/eject slot  
5. MODE – Audio source selection CD and  
AUX1  
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject  
button (3).  
6. TUNING – Knob for track selection  
symbol  
symbol  
ENTER.  
and directories have the  
. Start audio file playback with  
Starting playback (CD player)  
Eject all discs with one long press on the  
eject button. The entire magazine is emptied  
disc by disc. The message Eject all is shown  
in the display.  
If a music CD is in the player when the audio  
system is in CD mode then playback is start-  
ed automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and  
change to CD mode by pressing MODE.  
When the playback of a file is finished the  
playback of the other files in the same direc-  
tory continues. Directory change takes place  
1
High Performance and Premium Sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
       
10 Infotainment system  
CD functions  
automatically when all files in the current di-  
rectory have been played back.  
Press left/right on the navigation button if the  
display is not wide enough to show the whole  
audio file name.  
Different messages appear on the display  
depending on which random function has  
been selected.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
10  
– Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press  
ENTER.  
• RANDOM means that the tracks from only  
one music CD are played  
The function is deactivated when another CD  
is selected.  
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio  
files  
• RND ALL means that all tracks on all  
music CDs in the CD changer are played.  
Short presses right/left on the navigation  
button are used to scroll between CD tracks/  
audio files. Long presses are used to fast-  
wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the  
steering wheel keypad) can also be used for  
this purpose.  
Disc text  
• RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio  
files in a directory on the current CD are  
played.  
If title information is stored on a music CD it  
1
can be shown on the display .  
Activating/deactivating (CD player)  
If a normal music CD is being played:  
Activating/deactivating  
– Start CD playback.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Scan CD  
– Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
If a disc with audio files is being played:  
This function plays the first ten seconds of  
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to ac-  
tivate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to con-  
tinue playback of the current CD track/au-  
dio file.  
CDs  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Using low quality CD discs could result in  
poor or non-existent sound.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER.  
IMPORTANT  
Random  
Activating/deactivating (CD changer)  
This function plays the tracks in random or-  
der. The random CD tracks/audio files can be  
scrolled through in the normal way.  
If a normal music CD is being played:  
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diame-  
ter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc la-  
bels. The heat in the CD player may cause  
the label to come off, damaging the CD  
player.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press  
ENTER.  
NOTE  
It is only possible to scroll between random  
CD tracks on the current disc.  
The option All discs only applies to the mu-  
sic CDs in the changer.  
If a CD with audio files is being played:  
1
Only applies to CD changer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
       
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – audio system  
FM menu  
1. News  
CD changer menu  
1. Random  
10  
2. TP  
2. News  
3. TP  
3. PTY  
4. Radio text  
5. Advanced radio settings  
4. Disc text  
1
5. Audio settings  
1
6. Audio settings  
AUX menu  
1. AUX volume  
AM menu  
1. Audio settings  
1
2. News  
3. TP  
CD menu  
1. Random  
1
4. Audio settings  
2. News  
3. TP  
4. Disc text  
1
5. Audio settings  
1
Certain audio systems.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
       
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
10  
Phone system components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
       
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
SIM card  
Phone system components  
1. Antenna  
Emergency calls  
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be  
made without a SIM card as long as there is  
coverage by a GSM operator.  
10  
2. Steering wheel keypad (option)  
Most phone system functions can be ac-  
cessed via the keypad. See page 216.  
Making an emergency call  
– Activate the phone.  
– Ring the emergency number that applies  
to your region (within EU: 112).  
3. Microphone  
The hands free microphone is integrated in  
the roof console beside the rearview mirror.  
– Press ENTER.  
IDIS  
(Intelligent Driver Information System) The  
IDIS system allows incoming phone calls and  
text (SMS) messages to be delayed so that  
the driver can concentrate on driving. Incom-  
ing calls and text messages can be delayed  
five seconds before they are connected.  
Missed calls are shown on the display. IDIS  
can be deactivated using menu function  
5.6.2. See page 222.  
4. Centre console control panel  
All phone functions (except call volume) can  
be regulated via the control panel.  
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM  
card (Subscriber Identity Module). The card  
is available from various network operators.  
Contact your network operator if you experi-  
ence difficulties with the SIM card.  
5. Privacy handset (option)  
6. SIM card reader  
General  
• Always put traffic safety first.  
• If the driver needs to use the privacy  
handset, park the car in a safe place first.  
Double SIM cards  
Many network operators offer two SIM cards  
for the same phone number. The extra SIM  
card can be used in the car.  
• Switch off the phone system when refuel-  
ling the car.  
Inserting the SIM card  
– Switch off the phone and open the glove-  
box.  
• Switch off the system near blasting work.  
• Only entrust phone system servicing to an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
     
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
– Pull out the SIM card holder (1) in the SIM  
card reader.  
Phone controls  
Steering wheel keypad  
10  
– Position the SIM card in the holder with  
the metal surface visible. The bevelled  
edge of the SIM card should align with the  
bevel of the SIM card holder.  
– Carefully press in the SIM card holder.  
Menus  
Page 204 describes how to control phone  
functions with the menu system.  
Traffic safety  
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu  
system cannot be accessed at speeds in ex-  
cess of 8 km/h. Only activities started in the  
menu system can be completed. The speed  
limiter can be deactivated using menu func-  
tion 5.6.1 Menu lock, see page 221.  
Centre console control panel  
When the phone is active, the steering wheel  
keypad is locked to phone functions. To con-  
trol the audio system, the phone must be in  
standby mode.  
1. VOLUME – Control the background vol-  
ume from the radio, for example, during a  
call.  
2. Number and letter buttons  
1. ENTER – Works the same as on the  
3. MENU – Opens the main menu  
control panel.  
4. EXIT – End/refuse calls, clear entered  
2. EXIT – Works the same as on the  
characters  
control panel  
5. Navigation button – Scroll in menus  
and character rows  
3. Call volume – Increase/decrease  
4. Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus  
6. ENTER – Accept calls, activate the  
phone from standby mode  
7. PHONE – On/off and standby mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
     
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
– Press PHONE or EXIT.  
Call waiting  
On/Off  
A two-tone signal during a phone call indi-  
cates that there is another incoming call.  
Answer? appears on the display. The call  
can be refused or taken in the normal man-  
ner. If the incoming call is taken, the previous  
call is put on hold.  
Activating from standby mode  
– Press PHONE.  
A handset appears in the display when the  
phone system is active or in standby mode. If  
the ignition key is turned to position 0 when  
the phone is in one of these mode, the phone  
automatically resumes this mode the next  
time the key is turned to position I or II.  
10  
Making and receiving calls  
If the privacy handset is raised when a phone  
call is started, the sound will come from the  
handsfree system. For information on switch-  
ing between privacy handset and handsfree  
during a call, see page 219.  
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call  
– Press MENU.  
Activating the phone system  
Phone system functions can only be used  
when the phone is in active mode.  
– Scroll to Hold or Hold off and press  
ENTER.  
To call  
– Activate the phone system (if necessary).  
– Press PHONE.  
– Dial the number or use the phone book,  
see page 219.  
Dialling a third party  
– Put the call on hold.  
– Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and  
press ENTER.  
– Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release  
– Dial the number of the third party.  
Deactivating the phone system  
No calls can be received when the phone is  
deactivated.  
the handset by pressing it down.  
Switching between calls  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.  
Receiving a call  
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3,  
page 221.  
– Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is  
activated.  
– Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release  
Starting a conference call  
Standby  
the handset by pressing it down.  
A conference call consists of at least three  
parties that can talk to one another. Once a  
conference call has been initiated, no more  
parties can be connected. All calls are ended  
when the conference call is ended.  
In standby mode, the audio system can be in  
use while calls are received. However, it is  
not possible to make calls when in standby  
mode.  
Ending a call  
– Press EXIT or hang up the handset.  
Refusing a call  
– Press EXIT.  
Putting the phone in standby mode  
The phone must first be in active mode be-  
fore it can be put in standby mode.  
– Start two phone calls  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Join and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
     
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
button, twice for the second, etc. See  
table.  
Volume  
Handling numbers  
The phone uses the driver’s door or centre  
10  
1
– Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a  
row are to be entered using the same  
button, press * or wait a few seconds.  
speaker .  
Calling the last number dialled  
The phone automatically stores the last  
phone numbers dialled.  
Call volume  
A brief press on EXIT will clear an entered  
character. A long press on EXIT will clear all  
entered characters.  
Call volume is regulated  
with the buttons of the  
steering wheel keypad.  
– Press ENTER.  
– Scroll to a number and press ENTER.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
space 1- ? ! , . : " ' ( )  
a b c 2 ä Ã¥ à æ ç  
d e f 3 è é  
If the privacy handset is  
used, volume is regulated  
with a wheel on the side of  
the handset.  
Phone book  
If the phone book contains the desired par-  
ty’s contact information, these are shown in  
the display. Contact information can be  
stored on the SIM card and in the phone.  
g h i 4 ì  
j k l 5  
Audio system volume  
Storing contacts in the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø  
p q r s 7 ß  
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered  
during a phone call. Once the call is ended  
the previous volume is resumed. If the vol-  
ume is regulated during the call, the new lev-  
el is retained once the call is ended. Sound  
can also be automatically muted during a  
phone call; see menu 5.5.3, page 222. This  
function is only available with the Volvo inte-  
grated phone system.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to New number and press ENTER.  
– Enter a name and press ENTER.  
t u v 8 ü ù  
w x y z 9  
Used if two characters are to be  
ended with the same button.  
– Enter a number and press ENTER.  
0
#
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %  
– Scroll to SIM card or Phone and press  
ENTER.  
Switch between upper and lower  
case.  
Searching for contacts in the phone  
book  
Use the down arrow of the navigation button  
instead of MENU for direct access to the  
Search menu.  
Entering text  
Text is entered using the phone keypad.  
– Press the button with the desired charac-  
ter - once for the first character on the  
– Press MENU.  
1
Premium Sound.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
         
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
– Scroll to Search and press ENTER.  
Speed dial  
Calling from the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
A keypad button (1- 9) can be used as a  
speed dial number for a contact in the phone  
book.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
10  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to an item and press ENTER.  
All contacts in the phone book memory are  
displayed. The number of contacts displayed  
can be reduced by entering part of the con-  
tact’s name.  
– Press MENU.  
Copying entries between the SIM card  
and Phone book  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to One-key dial and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Select numbers and press EN-  
TER.  
– Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.  
NOTE  
– Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for  
– Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM  
the speed dial number and press ENTER.  
and press ENTER.  
Press ENTER to dial.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
Deleting contacts from the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
Functions during a call  
– Scroll to an item and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
Several functions are available during a call.  
Some functions can only be used when a call  
is on hold.  
– Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu  
system.  
– Scroll to Search and press ENTER.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
Calling using speed dial  
Press MENU to access the In-call menu and  
scroll to one of the following alternatives:  
– Hold the desired keypad button for  
approx. two seconds or briefly press the  
button and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to the item to be erased and press  
ENTER.  
• Mute/Mute off – Mute mode.  
– Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.  
• Hold/Hold off – Put a call on hold or  
resume a call.  
Erase all contacts  
– Press MENU.  
NOTE  
When the phone is switched on, it takes a  
while before speed dialling is available.  
• Handsfree/Handset – Use handsfree or  
the privacy handset.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and  
press ENTER.  
• Phone book – Access the phone book.  
To use the speed dial function One-key dial  
must be activated in the Phone book menu,  
see page 223.  
• Join – Conference calling (available if  
more than three parties are connected)  
If required, enter phone code. The factory-  
set default code is 1234.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
         
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
• Swap – Switch between two calls (availa-  
ble if up to three parties are connected).  
IMEI number  
To block the phone, you must provide your  
network operator with the phone’s IMEI  
number. This is a 15 digit serial number that  
is programmed in the phone. To display this  
number, dial *#06#. Make a note of this  
number and keep it in a safe place.  
10  
SMS – Short Message Service  
Reading SMS  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Read and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to a message and press ENTER.  
Specifications  
Output  
2 W  
The message text appears in the display. Ad-  
ditional selections can be made by pressing  
ENTER. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the  
menu system.  
SIM card  
Small  
1
Memory entries  
255  
SMS (Short Message  
Service)  
Yes  
Data/Fax  
No  
Writing and sending  
– Press MENU.  
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes  
– Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.  
– Enter text and press ENTER.  
1
The capacity of the SIM card’s memory varies  
depending on the subscription.  
– Scroll to Send and press ENTER.  
– Enter a phone number and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
   
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
Overview  
3. Phone book  
3.1. New number  
3.2. Search  
5. Tel. settings  
5.1. Network  
1. Call register  
10  
5.1.1.  
5.1.2.  
Automatic  
Manual select  
1.1. Missed calls  
1.2. Received calls  
1.3. Dialled no.  
1.4. Erase list  
3.3. Copy all  
3.3.1.  
3.3.2.  
SIM to phone  
Phone to SIM  
5.2. Language  
5.2.1.  
5.2.2.  
5.2.3.  
5.2.4.  
5.2.5.  
5.2.6.  
5.2.7.  
5.2.8.  
5.2.9.  
English UK  
English US  
Español  
Français CAN  
Français FR  
Italiano  
Nederlands  
Português BR  
Português P  
3.4. One-key dial  
1.4.1.  
1.4.2.  
1.4.3.  
1.4.4.  
All calls  
3.4.1.  
3.4.2.  
Active  
Select number  
Missed calls  
Received calls  
Dialled no.  
3.5. Erase SIM  
3.6. Erase phone  
3.7. Memory status  
1.5. Call duration  
1.5.1.  
1.5.2.  
1.5.3.  
1.5.4.  
Last call  
Number of calls  
Total time  
Reset time  
4. Call options  
4.1. Send my no.  
4.2. Call waiting  
4.3. Auto answer  
4.4. Automatic redial  
4.5. Diversion  
5.2.10. Suomi  
5.2.11. Svenska  
5.2.12. Dansk  
2. Messages  
2.1. Read  
2.2. Write  
5.2.13. Deutsch  
5.3. SIM security  
4.5.1.  
4.5.2.  
4.5.3.  
4.5.4.  
4.5.5.  
4.5.6.  
4.5.7.  
All calls  
5.3.1.  
5.3.2.  
5.3.3.  
On  
Off  
Automatic  
2.3. Message sett  
When engag.  
Not answered  
Not reachable  
Fax calls  
Data calls  
Cancel all diverts  
2.3.1.  
2.3.2.  
2.3.3.  
SMSC number  
Validity time  
Message type  
5.4. Edit codes  
5.4.1.  
PIN code  
5.4.2.  
Phone code  
5.5. Sound  
5.5.1.  
Ring volume  
5.5.2.  
Ring signal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
     
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
5.5.3.  
5.5.4.  
5.6. Traff. safety  
5.6.1.  
5.6.2.  
5.7. Factory sett.  
Mute radio  
Msg. beep  
Description of menu options  
1. Call register  
1.1. Missed calls  
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,  
erase or store the number in the phone book.  
2. Messages  
2.1. Read  
Received text messages. Select whether to  
erase, forward, change or save the entire  
message or parts of it.  
10  
Menu lock  
IDIS  
2.2. Write  
Write a message using the keypad. Choose  
whether to save or send it.  
1.2. Received calls  
List of received calls. You can choose to call,  
erase or store the number in the phone book.  
2.3. Message sett  
1.3. Dialled no.  
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the  
message centre to which messages are to be  
transferred as well as how long they are to be  
saved at the message centre. Contact your  
network operator for information on message  
settings. Normally, these settings should not  
be altered.  
List of previously dialled numbers. You can  
choose to call, erase or store the number in  
the phone book.  
1.4. Erase list  
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2  
and 1.3 as below.  
2.3.1.  
2.3.2.  
2.3.3.  
SMSC number  
Validity time  
Message type  
1.4.1.  
1.4.2.  
1.4.3.  
1.4.4.  
All  
Missed  
Received  
Dialled no.  
3. Phone book  
3.1. New number  
Store names and phone numbers in the  
phone book; see page 218.  
1.5. Call duration  
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.  
The phone code is required to reset the call  
timer (see menu 5.4).  
3.2. Search  
Search for a name in the phone book.  
1.5.1.  
1.5.2.  
1.5.3.  
1.5.4.  
Last call  
Number of calls  
Total time  
Reset time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
     
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
5.2.3.  
5.2.4.  
5.2.5.  
5.2.6.  
5.2.7.  
5.2.8.  
5.2.9.  
5.2.10. Suomi  
5.2.11. Svenska  
5.2.12. Dansk  
5.2.13. Deutsch  
Español  
3.3. Copy all  
Copy phone numbers and names from the  
SIM card to the phone memory.  
4.3. Auto answer  
Automatically answers incoming calls.  
Français CAN  
Français FR  
Italiano  
Nederlands  
Português BR  
Português P  
10  
4.4. Call back  
Calls a previously engaged number.  
3.3.1.  
3.3.2.  
From SIM to phone memory  
From phone to SIM memory  
4.5. Diversion  
Choose when and what type of calls are to  
be diverted to a specified phone number.  
3.4. One-key dial  
A number stored in the phone book can be  
stored as a speed dial number.  
4.5.1.  
All calls (this setting only applies  
during the call in progress).  
When engag.  
Not answered  
Not reachable  
Fax calls  
Data calls  
Cancel all diverts  
3.5. Erase SIM  
Erase the entire SIM card memory.  
4.5.2.  
4.5.3.  
4.5.4.  
4.5.5.  
4.5.6.  
4.5.7.  
5.3. SIM security  
3.6. Erase phone  
Erase the entire phone memory.  
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if  
the phone should automatically give the PIN  
code.  
3.7. Memory status  
Shows how many positions are occupied in  
the SIM card and phone memory. The table  
shows how many of the total number of posi-  
tions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250).  
5.3.1.  
5.3.2.  
5.3.3.  
On  
Off  
Automatic  
5. Phone settings  
5.1. Network  
5.4. Edit codes  
Choose a network automatically or manually.  
The selected operator is shown in the display  
in the phone’s basic mode.  
Change PIN or phone code. Make a note of  
the codes and keep them in a safe place.  
4. Call options  
4.1. Send my no.  
Displays or hides your phone number to/from  
the person you call. Contact your network  
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.  
5.4.1.  
5.4.2.  
PIN code  
5.1.1.  
5.1.2.  
Auto  
Manual select  
Phone code. The factory-set phone  
code 1234 is used until you change  
to your own code. The phone code  
is used to reset the call timer.  
5.2. Language  
Select the phone language.  
4.2. Call waiting  
Be alerted during a phone call that there is  
another incoming call.  
5.5. Sound  
5.5.1. Volume. Adjust the ring tone  
volume.  
5.2.1.  
5.2.2.  
English UK  
English US  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
 
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
5.5.2.  
Ring signal. There are seven  
different ring tones.  
Mute radio: On/Off  
Msg. beep  
10  
5.5.3.  
5.5.4.  
5.6. Traffic safety  
5.6.1.  
Menu lock. Deactivating the menu  
lock allows access to the entire  
menu while driving.  
5.6.2.  
IDIS. If the IDIS function is deacti-  
vated, incoming calls are not  
delayed, regardless of the driving  
situation.  
5.7. Factory sett.  
Reset the system’s factory settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
10 Infotainment system  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
   
Type designation .................................................................................... 228  
Dimensions and weights........................................................................ 229  
Engine specifications............................................................................. 230  
Engine oil................................................................................................ 232  
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................. 236  
Fuel......................................................................................................... 238  
Catalytic converter................................................................................. 241  
Electrical system.................................................................................... 242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
SPECIFICATIONS  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Specifications  
Type designation  
Knowing the car’s type designation, vehicle  
identification and engine numbers can facili-  
tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding  
the car and when ordering spare parts and  
accessories.  
11  
1. Type designation, vehicle identification  
number, maximum permissible weights,  
codes for colour and upholstery and type  
approval number.  
2. Decal for parking heater.  
3. Engine type designation, component  
and serial number.  
4. Decal for engine oil.  
5. Gearbox type designation and serial  
number:  
(a) manual gearbox  
(b), (c) automatic gearbox  
6. VIN number (type and model year des-  
ignation plus chassis number).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
         
11 Specifications  
Dimensions and weights  
Maximum load: See registration document.  
Dimensions  
Max. roof load: 75 kg  
Length: 447 cm  
Width: 177 cm  
Trailer with brakes:  
Wheelbase: 264 cm  
Front track: 154 – 155 cm  
Rear track: 153 – 154 cm  
Weights  
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank  
90 % full and all fluids. The weight of passen-  
gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load  
carriers, space box etc. and towball load  
(when a trailer is hitched, see table), influenc-  
es the payload and must not be included in  
the kerb weight. Permitted weight (in addition  
to driver) = Gross vehicle weight–Kerb  
weight.  
Maximum  
Maximum trailer  
towball  
11  
weight kg  
load kg  
1.6 1200  
75  
1.6D 1300  
1.8 1300  
See decal location on page 228.  
2.0 1350  
1. Max. total weight  
others 1500  
2. Max. train weight (car+trailer)  
3. Max. front axle load  
4. Max. rear axle load  
Trailer without brakes  
Maximum  
towball load  
kg  
Maximum trailer  
weight kg  
WARNING  
700  
50  
The car’s driving characteristics change de-  
pending on how heavily it is loaded and how  
the load is distributed.  
Only for China  
1. Max. total weight  
2. Maximum trailer weight  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
       
11 Specifications  
Engine specifications  
1.6  
1.8  
2.0  
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
Engine designation  
Output (kW/rpm)  
(hp/rpm)  
B4164S3  
74/6000  
100/6000  
150/4000  
4
B4184S11  
92/6000  
125/6000  
165/4000  
4
B4204S3  
107/6000  
145/6000  
185/5000  
4
B5244S5  
103/5000  
140/5000  
220/4000  
5
B5244S4  
125/6000  
170/6000  
230/4400  
5
B5254T3  
162/5000  
220/5000  
320/1500–4800  
5
11  
Torque (Nm/rpm)  
No. of cylinders  
Bore (mm)  
79  
83  
87  
83  
83  
83  
Stroke (mm)  
81,4  
83,1  
83  
90  
90  
93.2  
Swept volume (litres)  
Compression ratio  
1.60  
1.80  
1.99  
2.44  
2.44  
2.52  
11.0:1  
10.8:1  
10.8:1  
10.3:1  
10.3:1  
9.0:1  
Engine type designation, component and se-  
rial number can be read on the engine, see  
page 228.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
     
11 Specifications  
Engine specifications  
1.6D  
2.0D  
2.4D  
D5  
1
Engine designation  
D4164T  
D4204T  
D5244T8  
D5244T9  
Output (kW/rpm)  
(hp/rpm)  
80/4000  
109/4000  
240/-  
4
100/4000  
136/4000  
320/2000  
4
120/5500  
132/4000  
163/5500  
180/4000  
11  
Torque (Nm/rpm)  
No. of cylinders  
Bore (mm)  
340/1750-2750  
350/1750 - 3250  
5
5
75  
85  
81  
81  
Stroke (mm)  
88,3  
88  
93.2  
2.40  
17.0:1  
93.2  
2.40  
17.0:1  
Swept volume (litres)  
Compression ratio  
1.56  
2.00  
18.3:1  
18.5:1  
1
Belgium  
Engine type designation, component and se-  
rial number can be read on the engine, see  
page 228.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
Viscosity chart  
Adverse driving conditions  
Check the oil level more frequently for long  
journeys:  
IMPORTANT  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact.  
An approved engine oil must be used in  
order that the recommended service inter-  
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed  
grade of oil (see the engine compartment  
decal) for both filling and oil change, other-  
wise you will risk affecting service life, start-  
ing characteristics, fuel consumption and  
environmental impact.  
• towing a caravan or trailer.  
• in mountainous regions.  
• at high speeds.  
11  
• in temperatures colder than –30 °C or  
hotter than +40 °C.  
This can produce abnormally high oil temper-  
ature or oil consumption.  
Also check the oil level more often if the car  
is often driven short distances (less than  
10 km) when temperatures are low (below  
+5 °C).  
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for ad-  
verse driving conditions. It provides extra  
protection for the engine.  
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran-  
ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed  
grade and viscosity is not used.  
Volvo recommends  
oil products.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
     
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 228.  
Oil decal  
Oil grade: ACEA A3/B3/B4  
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30  
11  
When driving under adverse conditions, use  
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.  
1
Volume between  
MIN – MAX (litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
B5244S5  
1.3  
5.8  
B5244S4  
B5254T3  
1
Including filter change.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
   
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
Oil decal  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 228.  
Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B  
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30  
11  
When driving under adverse conditions, use  
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.  
1
Volume between  
MIN – MAX (litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
1.6  
B4164S3  
B4184S11  
B4204S3  
D4164T  
0.75  
4.0  
4.3  
1.8  
2.0  
1.6D  
2.0D  
1.0  
2.0  
3.7  
5.5  
D4204T  
1
Including filter change.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
 
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 228.  
Oil decal  
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5  
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30  
11  
1
Volume between MIN – MAX  
(litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
D5  
D5244T8  
1.5  
6
2
2.4D  
D5244T9  
1
2
Including filter change  
Belgium  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
   
11 Specifications  
Fluids and lubricants  
Fluid  
System  
Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:  
Gearbox oil  
1.6 Manual 5 speed  
1.8 Manual 5 speed  
1.6D Manual 5 speed  
1.8F Manual 5-speed  
2.0 Manual 5-speed  
2.0D Manual 5 speed  
2.0D Manual 6 speed  
D5 Automatic gearbox  
2.4 Automatic gearbox  
2.4i Manual 5 speed  
2.4i Automatic gearbox  
T5 Manual 6 speed  
2.1  
1.9  
1.9  
1.9  
1.9  
2.2  
1.7  
7. 7 5  
7. 7 5  
2.1  
7. 7 5  
2.0  
7. 7 5  
Transmission fluid: WSD-M2C200-C  
11  
Transmission fluid: WSS-M2C200-C3  
Transmission fluid: WSD-M2C200-C  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
Transmission fluid: MTF 97309-10  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
Transmission fluid: MTF 97309-10  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
T5 Automatic gearbox  
NOTE  
IMPORTANT  
Under normal driving conditions the gear-  
box oil does not need changing during its  
service life. However, it may be necessary  
under adverse driving conditions, see  
page 232  
The recommended transmission fluid must  
be used to prevent damage to the gearbox.  
Do not mix with any other transmission flu-  
id. If the transmission is topped up with a  
different fluid, contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop for servicing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
       
11 Specifications  
Fluids and lubricants  
Fluid  
System  
Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:  
Coolant  
5-cyl. Petrol, manual gearbox  
5-cyl. Petrol, automatic gearbox  
5-cyl. Diesel (D5)  
9.5  
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with  
water, see packaging. The thermostat starts  
opening at: 90 ºC in petrol engines and at 82 ºC  
in diesel engines.  
10.0  
11.0  
11  
petrol engine (1.6) 82 ºC  
4-cyl. Petrol (1.8, 1.8F and 2.0)  
4-cyl. Diesel (2.0D)  
7. 5  
diesel engine (1.6D) 83 ºC  
9.5  
4-cyl. Petrol (1.6)  
6.2  
7. 2  
4-cyl. Diesel (1.6D)  
1
180–200 grams  
Compressor oil PAG  
Air conditioning  
500–600 grams  
Refrigerant R134a (HFC134a)  
DOT 4+  
Brake fluid  
0.6  
Power steering  
1-1,2  
Power steering fluid: WSS M2C204-A or equiv-  
alent product with same specifications.  
Washer fluid  
4-cyl. Petrol/Diesel  
5-cyl. Petrol  
4.0  
6.5  
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo,  
mixed with water for temperatures below  
freezing.  
Fuel tank  
See page 238  
1
Weights can vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
 
11 Specifications  
Fuel  
Consumption, emissions and volume  
1
Emissions of CO  
(g/km)  
Tank volume  
(litres)  
Consumption  
litre/100 km  
2
Engine  
Gearbox  
1.6  
1.8  
1.8F  
2.0  
2.4  
2.4i  
B4164S3  
B4184S11  
B4184S8  
B4204S3  
B5244S5  
B5244S4  
Manual 5 speed (IB5)  
7. 2  
7. 3  
171  
174  
177  
177  
217  
203  
217  
208  
224  
229  
241  
55  
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)  
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)  
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Manual 5 speed (M56H)  
11  
7. 4  
7. 4  
9.1  
8.5  
9.1  
8.7  
9.4  
9.6  
10.1  
62  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Manual 6-speed (M66)  
T5  
B5254T3  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Manual 6-speed (M66)  
T5  
AWD  
57  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
1
Measured in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268 comb, see page 240.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
     
11 Specifications  
Fuel  
Emissions of CO  
Consumption  
litre/100 km  
Tank volume  
(litres)  
2
Engine  
Gearbox  
(g/km)  
1.6D  
2.0D  
D4164T (EURO3) (EURO4)  
D4204T (EURO3)  
(EURO4)  
Manual 5 speed (MTX75)  
Manual 6 speed (MMT6)  
4.9  
5.6  
5.8  
5.6  
5.6  
7. 0  
129  
148  
154  
148  
148  
184  
184  
52  
11  
(EURO3)  
Manual 5 speed (M56L2)  
(EURO4)  
D5  
D5244T8  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)  
60  
1
2.4D  
7. 0  
D5244T9  
1
Belgium  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
11 Specifications  
Fuel  
Fuel consumption and emissions of  
carbon dioxide  
Petrol  
Diesel  
Most engines can be run with octane ratings  
of 91, 95 and 98 RON.  
The diesel engine’s fuel system is sensitive to  
contaminants, see page 179.  
Official fuel consumption figures are based  
on a standard driving cycle in accordance  
with EU Directive 80/1268 comb. Fuel con-  
sumption figures may change if the car is  
equipped with extra equipment that affects  
the car’s weight. The manner in which the car  
is driven and other non-technical factors can  
affect fuel consumption. Consumption is  
higher and power output lower for fuel with  
an octane rating of 91 RON.  
• 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder  
engines and should only be used in ex-  
ceptional cases with other engines.  
11  
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.  
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum  
performance and minimum fuel consump-  
tion.  
When driving in temperatures above +38 ºC,  
it is recommended to use fuel with the high-  
est possible octane rating for optimum per-  
formance and fuel economy.  
Petrol – Norm EN 228.  
IMPORTANT  
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-  
ing the catalytic converter. In order for the  
Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol  
with petrol, the fuel system could be dam-  
aged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
       
11 Specifications  
Catalytic converter  
TM  
General  
Lambda-sond oxygen sensor  
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system  
intended to reduce emissions and improve  
fuel economy.  
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to  
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow  
of exhaust gasses close to the engine so that  
it quickly reaches operating temperature. The  
catalytic converter consists of a monolith  
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The chan-  
nel walls are lined with a thin layer of plati-  
num, rhodium and palladium. These metals  
act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and  
accelerate a chemical reaction without being  
used up themselves.  
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con-  
tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.  
This value is fed into an electronic system  
that continuously controls the injectors. The  
ratio of air to fuel is continuously adjusted.  
These adjustments create optimal condi-  
tions for efficient combustion, and together  
with the three-way catalytic converter reduce  
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon  
monoxide and nitrous oxides).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
       
11 Specifications  
Electrical system  
General  
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-  
nator. Single pole system in which the chas-  
sis and engine block are used as conductors.  
Battery  
11  
Voltage  
12 V  
12 V  
12 V  
1
2
Cold start capacity (CCA)  
590 A  
600 A  
120 min  
70  
700 A  
135 min  
80  
Reserve capacity (RC)  
Capacity (Ah)  
100 min  
60  
1
Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.  
2
Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, audio system Premium Sound, fuel-driven heater or  
RTI.  
If the battery is changed, replace it with a  
battery of the same cold start capacity and  
reserve capacity as the original (see the decal  
on the battery).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
   
11 Specifications  
Electrical system  
Bulbs  
Lighting  
Output W  
Socket  
Dipped beam  
55  
35  
55  
21  
21  
5
H7  
D2S  
Bi-Xenon  
Main beam  
HB3  
11  
Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp  
Direction indicators, rear/front (yellow)  
Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps  
BA15s  
BAU 15s  
BAY15d  
SV8.5  
Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate  
lighting  
5
Vanity mirror  
1.2  
5
SV5.5  
W 2.1 x 9.5d  
W 2.1 x 9.5d  
H11  
Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps  
Direction indicators in door mirrors (yellow)  
Fog lamps  
5
55  
3
Glovebox lighting  
BA9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
   
11 Specifications  
Electrical system  
Type approval, remote control system  
Country  
1
A, B, CY, CZ,  
D, DK, E, EST,  
F, FIN, GB, GR,  
H, I, IRL, L, LT,  
LV, M, NL, P,  
11  
PL, S, SK, SLO  
IS, LI, N, CH  
HR  
ROK  
BR  
Delphi 2003-07-15,  
Germany R-LPD1-03-0151  
RC  
ETC093LPD0155  
1
Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control  
system conforms to the essential characteristic  
requirements and other relevant regulations of  
directive 1999/5/EC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
 
11 Specifications  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
   
Alphabetical index  
Alarm, radio functions .............................. 208  
All-wheel drive .......................................... 121  
Approach light duration  
A
B
A/C ..............................................................72  
Backrest  
electronic climate control .......................76  
manual climate control ...........................73  
ABS ...........................................................122  
rear seat, tipping ....................................88  
active lamps .......................................... 62  
setting .................................................... 67  
Audio  
Bass speaker ............................................205  
Battery  
ABS fault ................................................43  
Active Yaw Control ...................................124  
care ......................................................186  
jump starting ........................................133  
overload ...............................................111  
replacement .........................................187  
steering wheel keypad .......................... 55  
Audio volume  
Additional heater .........................................79  
AF – automatic frequency update .............210  
Air conditioning ...........................................72  
audio system ....................................... 205  
Audio, see also Sound ............................. 205  
control ....................................................97  
symbols on the battery ........................187  
Blind spot (BLIS) .......................................128  
ECC ........................................................74  
general ...................................................70  
Air distribution .............................................77  
AUTO  
climate control settings ......................... 74  
preset storage ..................................... 207  
AUTO CLIMATE .......................................... 74  
Bonnet ......................................................178  
Booster cushion  
ECC ........................................................75  
Air quality system, ECC ..............................75  
Auto volume control ................................. 206  
Automatic car wash .................................. 168  
Automatic dimming .................................... 60  
Automatic gearbox ................................... 118  
lowering .................................................32  
raising ....................................................31  
Booster cushion, integrated .......................31  
Air vents ......................................................70  
Airbag  
deactivation ............................................20  
driver’s and front passenger side ..........16  
Alarm  
Brake fluid, checking and topping up .......183  
Brake system ....................................122, 183  
Brakes  
safety systems .................................... 118  
towing and recovery ............................ 131  
trailer ........................................... 134, 135  
W-button ............................................. 120  
Automatic locking ..................................... 101  
alarm lamp ...........................................105  
alarm signals ........................................106  
arming ..................................................105  
automatic alarm activation ...................106  
deactivating a triggered alarm .............106  
disarming .............................................105  
general .................................................105  
testing the alarm system ......................107  
handbrake ..............................................57  
Bulb holder  
location of the bulbs ............................192  
number plate lighting ...........................192  
removal ................................................191  
Automatic relocking .................................. 101  
Autostart ................................................... 113  
Average fuel consumption .......................... 51  
AWD ......................................................... 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
Alphabetical index  
Bulbs  
replacement .........................................188  
specifications .......................................243  
Checks  
fluids and oils .............................. 177, 180  
Child  
child seats and airbags ......................... 28  
Child seat  
fixture system ........................................ 33  
installation ............................................. 33  
Children  
Climate control settings  
AUTO .....................................................74  
Clock ...........................................................41  
setting the clock ....................................41  
Clutch fluid, checking and topping up ......183  
C
Call  
Coat hanger ................................................87  
Collision  
functions during an ongoing call ..........219  
phone volume ......................................218  
Call waiting ................................................217  
collision sensors ....................................23  
crash mode ............................................27  
IC ...........................................................23  
inflatable curtain ....................................23  
Colour code, paint ....................................171  
child safety locks ................................. 104  
child seats and side airbags .................. 21  
position in car, table .............................. 30  
safety ..................................................... 31  
safety equipment ................................... 28  
Cigarette lighter socket  
Calls  
making and receiving ...........................217  
Car care  
leather upholstery ................................170  
Car settings .................................................66  
Combined instrument panel .......................41  
Compass .....................................................60  
Car upholstery ...........................................169  
Car wash ...................................................168  
Cargo area  
front seat ............................................... 47  
rear seat ................................................ 57  
Clean inside and out ..................................... 8  
calibration ..............................................60  
Condensation ............................................179  
Control panel  
Cleaning  
bag holder ..............................................90  
electrical socket .....................................90  
load retaining eyelets .............................90  
loading .................................................143  
Catalytic converter ....................................241  
personal preferences .............................65  
Control panel in driver’s door  
automatic car wash ............................. 168  
car wash .............................................. 168  
leather upholstery ................................ 169  
seatbelts .............................................. 170  
upholstery ............................................ 169  
water-repellent surface ....................... 169  
Climate  
operation ................................................58  
Coolant, checking and topping up ...........182  
Cooling system .........................................110  
Crash, see Collision ....................................23  
Cruise control .............................................54  
recovery ...............................................131  
CD discs  
storage compartment ............................87  
CD functions .............................................211  
personal preferences ............................. 66  
Climate control  
Centre rear head restraint ...........................88  
general ................................................... 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Alphabetical index  
economical .......................................... 110  
in water ................................................ 110  
slippery driving conditions .................. 110  
with open tailgate ................................ 110  
with trailer ............................................ 134  
Driving in water ......................................... 110  
Emissions system  
D
fault indicator .........................................43  
Engine .......................................................178  
Deadlocks .................................................103  
temporary deactivation ........................103  
temporary disconnection  
Engine compartment ................................178  
Engine oil ..................................................180  
of alarm detectors ................................106  
Defroster .....................................................73  
capacities .............................233, 234, 235  
changing ..............................................180  
driving under adverse driving  
DSTC, see also Stability control system .. 124  
DSTC, see also Stability system  
door mirrors ...........................................73  
rear window ...........................................73  
Designation of dimensions ........................148  
deactivating/activating ........................ 124  
symbol ................................................... 43  
conditions ............................................232  
filter ......................................................180  
oil grade ...............................................232  
oil pressure ............................................44  
Engine specifications ................................230  
Diesel ........................................................179  
engine preheater ....................................43  
Diesel filter ................................................179  
ECC, electronic climate control .................. 71  
ECO pressure  
Diesel particle filter ....................................113  
Dipped beam ........................................48, 50  
Direction indicators .....................................50  
Disc text ....................................................212  
Display  
Entry, keyless ..............................................67  
Environmental philosophy ............................7  
EON –Enhanced Other Networks .............210  
Equalizer ...................................................206  
Expectant mothers  
fuel economy ....................................... 152  
table ..................................................... 153  
Economical driving ................................... 110  
Electrical socket  
cargo area ............................................. 90  
centre console ....................................... 47  
rear seat ................................................ 57  
Electronic immobiliser ................................ 94  
messages .........................................45, 46  
Display lighting ............................................49  
safety .....................................................13  
F
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II ..............204, 206  
Door mirrors ................................................62  
Driver’s door control panel  
Fan ..............................................................72  
Emergency calls ....................................... 215  
Emergency puncture repair ...................... 158  
Emission control ........................................... 7  
Emissions ................................................. 238  
carbon dioxide .................................... 240  
ECC .......................................................74  
Fast-wind ..................................................212  
overview .................................................40  
Driving  
Floor mats ...................................................82  
Fluids and oils  
adverse driving conditions ...................176  
cooling system .....................................110  
checks .........................................177, 180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Alphabetical index  
Fluids, capacities ..............................236, 237  
Fog lamps  
Glovebox .................................................... 87  
Instrument overview  
locking ................................................. 102  
Gross vehicle weight ................................ 229  
left-hand drive ................................36, 214  
right-hand drive .....................................38  
Integrated booster cushion .........................31  
On/Off ........................................51, 52, 49  
Frequency update, automatic ...................210  
Interior rearview mirror ................................60  
Intermittent wiping ......................................52  
ISOFIX  
Fuel  
Handbrake .................................................. 57  
Hazard warning flashers ............................. 56  
Headlamp pattern ..................................... 144  
Headlamps  
consumption ....................................7, 238  
fuel consumption, display ......................51  
fuel economy .......................................152  
fuel filter ...............................................179  
fuel system ...........................................179  
level indicator .........................................43  
parking heater ........................................79  
refuelling ...............................................112  
Fuel gauge ..................................................41  
fixture system ........................................33  
J
off/on ..................................................... 48  
Heating  
Jack ..........................................................155  
Jump starting ............................................133  
front seats ....................................... 73, 76  
Homesafe light duration ....................... 50, 62  
K
Kerb weight ...............................................229  
Key ..............................................................94  
Fuse table  
setting .................................................... 67  
fuses in the engine compartment ........196  
fuses in the passenger compartment ..199  
Fuses  
I
keyless lock and ignition system ...........98  
remote control .......................................94  
Key blade ....................................................95  
IDIS ........................................................... 215  
Ignition keys ............................................. 114  
IMEI number ............................................. 220  
Important! texts ............................................ 6  
Immobiliser ......................................... 94, 114  
Incoming calls .......................................... 217  
Information display ..................................... 45  
Infotainment  
changing ..............................................194  
general .................................................194  
relay/fuse box in the engine  
compartment ........................................195  
relay/fuse box in the passenger  
active locks ............................................96  
Keyless drive ...............................................98  
starting the car .....................................115  
Keyless entry ..............................................67  
compartment ........................................198  
Kick-down  
G
Gearbox  
automatic gearbox ...............................118  
menus .................................................. 204  
Instrument lighting ................................ 48, 49  
automatic .............................................118  
manual .................................................116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Alphabetical index  
location of the bulbs in the bulb holder 192  
main beam ........................................... 189  
parking lamps ...................................... 190  
rear lamp ............................................. 191  
side marker lamps ............................... 190  
vanity mirror ........................................ 193  
Menu structure  
L
media player ........................................213  
phone, menu options ...........................222  
phone, overview ..................................221  
Menus  
Lambda-sond ............................................241  
Leather upholstery, washing instructions .170  
Lighting  
automatic lighting, dipped beam ...........48  
automatic lighting, passenger  
audio system .......................................204  
Messages in the information display ..........45  
Lights  
main beam "flash" ................................. 50  
Loading  
compartment ..........................................84  
bulb replacement, general ...................188  
bulbs, specifications ............................243  
dipped beam ..........................................48  
display lighting .......................................49  
exterior ...................................................48  
front fog lamps ...........................49, 51, 52  
headlamp levelling .................................48  
homesafe light duration ...................50, 62  
in passenger compartment ....................84  
instrument lighting .................................49  
lighting panel ..........................................48  
main/dipped beam .................................50  
position/parking lamps ..........................48  
reading lamps ........................................84  
rear fog lamp ..........................................49  
Lighting, bulb replacement  
Misting  
rear window ...........................................73  
removing with defroster function .....73, 75  
timer function, A/C .................................73  
timer function, ECC ...............................75  
treating the windows .............................70  
general ................................................. 143  
load capacity ....................................... 143  
Lock settings, personal .............................. 65  
N
Locking ..................................................... 101  
NEWS ........................................................209  
News broadcast ........................................209  
Note texts .....................................................6  
from inside ........................................... 102  
from outside ........................................ 101  
unlocking ............................................. 101  
Lubricants, capacities ...................... 236, 237  
O
M
Oil, see also Engine oil  
Main beam .................................................. 50  
oil pressure ............................................44  
Outside temperature gauge ........................41  
off/on ..................................................... 48  
switching and flashing ........................... 50  
Maintenance  
cargo area ............................................193  
courtesy lighting ...................................192  
dipped beam ........................................189  
direction indicators ..............................190  
fog lamp ...............................................191  
front ......................................................188  
Oxyhydrogen gas ......................................133  
P
rustproofing ......................................... 172  
self-maintenance ................................. 177  
Making calls .............................................. 217  
PACOS ........................................................19  
Paint  
Manual gearbox ........................................ 116  
paintwork damage and touching up ....171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Alphabetical index  
Paintwork  
colour code ..........................................171  
Parking assistance ....................................126  
standby mode ..................................... 217  
steering wheel keypad .......................... 55  
text input ............................................. 218  
Rain sensor .................................................53  
Random, CD and audio files .....................212  
RDS functions ...........................................208  
Phone book  
sensors for parking assistance ............127  
Parking brake ........................................44, 57  
resetting ...............................................210  
Reading lamps ............................................84  
handling numbers ................................ 218  
Phone system ........................................... 214  
Parking heater  
Rearview mirrors  
PI seek ...................................................... 210  
Pinch protection, sunroof ........................... 65  
Polishing ................................................... 169  
Power seat .................................................. 83  
battery and fuel ......................................79  
general ...................................................78  
parking on a hill ......................................78  
time setting ............................................79  
Parking lamps .............................................48  
compass ................................................60  
door .......................................................62  
electrically retractable ............................62  
interior ....................................................60  
Recirculation ...............................................72  
Passenger compartment  
ECC .......................................................75  
Recovery ...................................................131  
Power steering fluid, checking  
and topping up ......................................... 184  
lighting ...................................................84  
Passenger compartment filter .....................70  
Refrigerant ..................................................70  
Refuelling  
Power windows  
Personal preferences ..................................66  
blocking ................................................. 59  
driver’s door control panel .................... 58  
passenger seat ...................................... 59  
rear seat ................................................ 59  
Programme functions ............................... 208  
approach light duration ..........................67  
auto blower adjust .................................66  
automatic locking ...................................67  
doors unlock ..........................................67  
homesafe light duration .........................67  
keyless entry ..........................................67  
lock confirm, light ...................................66  
recirculation timer ..................................66  
unlock confirm, light ...............................66  
Petrol grade ..............................................240  
fuel cap ................................................112  
refuelling ..............................................112  
Refuse calls ...............................................217  
REG –Regional radio programmes ...........210  
Relay/fuse box  
PTY – Programme type ............................ 209  
Putting calls on hold ................................. 217  
in the engine compartment ..................195  
in the passenger compartment ............198  
Remote control ...........................................94  
R
Radio  
detachable key blade ............................95  
functions ................................................94  
keyless drive ..........................................98  
replacing the battery ..............................97  
radio settings ....................................... 207  
radio stations ....................................... 207  
Radio text ................................................. 210  
Phone ........................................................216  
calling from the phone book ................219  
on/off ....................................................217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
Alphabetical index  
Remote control system, type approval .....244  
Reverse gear inhibitor  
SIM card ................................................... 215  
SIPS bags ................................................... 21  
SMS  
Starting from cold  
automatic gearbox ...............................118  
Starting the engine ....................................113  
five-speed ............................................116  
six-speed, petrol ..................................117  
Rustproofing .............................................172  
keyless drive ........................................115  
STC ...........................................................124  
read ..................................................... 220  
write ..................................................... 220  
Soot filter ............................................ 46, 113  
Steering lock .............................................114  
Steering wheel  
S
SOOT FILTER FULL ................................. 113  
Sound  
Safety ..........................................................12  
adjustment .............................................56  
cruise control .........................................54  
keypad .................................................216  
keypad left-hand side ............................54  
keypad right-hand side ..........................55  
Steering wheel keypad  
safety systems, table .............................26  
SCAN  
audio settings ...................................... 205  
Spare wheel .............................................. 155  
CD and audio files ................................212  
radio stations .......................................208  
Seat  
Speed classes, tyres ................................ 148  
Speed dial ................................................ 219  
Speed dial numbers ................................. 219  
Speedometer .............................................. 41  
Spin Control ............................................. 124  
Spin control .............................................. 124  
SRS system  
key memory ...........................................83  
power seat .............................................83  
Seatbelt .......................................................12  
phone/audio ...........................................55  
Stone chips and scratches .......................171  
Storage compartment .................................86  
pregnancy ..............................................13  
rear seat .................................................13  
seatbelt tensioner ..................................14  
Seatbelt reminder ........................................13  
CD discs ................................................87  
rear side panels .....................................87  
Storage spaces in the passenger  
compartment ..............................................86  
Seatbelt tensioner .......................................14  
Seats  
general ................................................... 17  
switch .................................................... 20  
Stability control system ............................ 124  
Storing stations, manual and automatic ...207  
Subwoofer ................................................205  
Sunroof .......................................................64  
manual setting ........................................82  
Service locking ............................................96  
Stability system  
closing with remote control ...................65  
pinch protection .....................................65  
sunscreen ..............................................65  
Sunscreen, sunroof .....................................65  
indication ............................................... 43  
Stains ........................................................ 169  
Service programme ...................................176  
Settings, see Personal preferences ............66  
Side airbags ................................................21  
Standby mode, phone .............................. 217  
Standby, phone ........................................ 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Alphabetical index  
Surround ...........................................204, 206  
Symbols ....................................................125  
removing .............................................. 141  
specifications ...................................... 137  
Towing eye ............................................... 131  
tread wear indicators ...........................149  
winter tyres ..........................................149  
U
indicator symbols ...................................43  
warning symbols ....................................42  
TP –traffic information .............................. 208  
Traction control ........................................ 124  
Traction control system ............................ 124  
Traffic information .................................... 208  
Trailer  
Unlocking  
T
from inside ...........................................102  
from outside .........................................101  
keyless .................................................101  
settings ..................................................66  
tailgate .................................................101  
Tachometer .................................................41  
Tailgate  
driving with open tailgate .....................110  
locking/unlocking ...........................94, 101  
Tank volume ..............................................238  
cable .................................................... 136  
trailer weight ........................................ 229  
Trip computer ............................................. 51  
Vehicle data ..............................................176  
Ventilation ...................................................70  
Volume  
Temperature  
actual temperature .................................71  
passenger compartment,  
electronic climate control .......................76  
passenger compartment, manual  
climate control .......................................73  
Temporary spare  
Trip meter ................................................... 41  
Tuning ....................................................... 207  
Type approval, remote control system ..... 244  
Type designation ...................................... 228  
Tyre  
auto volume control .............................206  
phone/media player .............................218  
programme types ................................210  
Volume, see also Audio volume ................205  
Temporary spare ..................................150  
Ticket clip ....................................................87  
W
Warning lamp  
pressure .............................................. 152  
Tyres  
Timer  
designation of dimensions .................. 148  
direction of rotation ............................. 151  
driving characteristics ......................... 148  
ECO pressure ...................................... 153  
general ................................................. 148  
puncture repair .................................... 158  
speed classes ...................................... 148  
summer and winter wheels ................. 151  
Stability and traction control system ...124  
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system ..............15  
A/C .........................................................73  
ECC ........................................................75  
Towbar, see Towing equipment ................136  
Warning! texts ...............................................6  
Warning triangle ........................................154  
Washer fluid, topping up ...........................182  
Washers  
Towing ......................................................131  
Towing equipment  
general .................................................136  
installation ............................................138  
windscreen and headlamps ...................52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
Alphabetical index  
Washing the car ........................................168  
Water-repellent surface  
cleaning ................................................169  
Waxing ......................................................169  
Wheels  
fitting ....................................................157  
removal ................................................156  
rims ......................................................150  
Whiplash injury WHIPS ...............................24  
WHIPS .........................................................24  
child seat/booster cushion .....................24  
Windscreen wipers  
rain sensor .............................................53  
Windscreen wipers and washers ................52  
Winter driving ............................................113  
Winter tyres ...............................................149  
Wiper blades  
changing ..............................................185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  

Technika DVD Player DVDFAW08 User Manual
TOA Electronics Car Amplifier VM 2120 User Manual
Toshiba Laptop WT10 A User Manual
Toshiba Portable DVD Player SD P90DTSE User Manual
ViewSonic Flat Panel Television N2010 User Manual
Vinotemp Refrigerator VT 18TEDS User Manual
Vinotemp Refrigerator VT 36 User Manual
Vizio Computer Accessories CPU 55 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Oven CO1717 User Manual
Weed Eater Lawn Mower 152336 User Manual